受具足戒篇
1. Upasampadākaṇḍo
在这里,如果站在这个立场上,讲说与佛陀功德相应的话,既能令善士们心生欢喜,也能使这部论著具备不疯癫的言语;一旦不疯癫的言语成立,人们就会觉得值得听闻。因此,我们要赞叹佛陀的功德。据说,我们的世尊,从梵天、诸天、诸佛开始算起,直到古代的释迦族乔达摩,以心中发愿而言,从犍陀罗车本生等开始,直到中洲燃灯佛,以言语而言,从中洲燃灯佛足下开始,以身语两方面而言,全部汇总起来,直到须大拏王身,在二十阿僧祇劫中圆满诸波罗蜜,为了获得一切知智,连装饰好的头都砍下来布施,那位一切知菩萨的头,比住在赡部洲的人从炉灶里拿出来的还要多;挖出涂了眼药的眼睛布施,那眼睛比无云虚空中天上的群星还要多;割下心脏的肉或右臂布施,那肉比十六万八千由旬大的须弥山王还要多;挖出鲜血布施,那血比四大海的水还要多;把像玛蒂那样的妻子、像贾利和黑胜那样的儿子布施给别人当奴隶,那数量更是超出了计算的范围。就是这样圆满诸波罗蜜的。
Imasmiñhi ṭhāne ṭhatvā buddhaguṇapaṭisaṃyuttāya kathāya vuccamānāya sādhūnaṃ cittasampahaṃsanañceva, imasseva pakaraṇassa anummattavacanabhāvo ca bhaveyya, anummattavacanatte ca siddhe sotabbaṃ maññissanti, tasmā buddhaguṇaṃ vaṇṇayissāma. Amhākaṃ kira bhagavā brahmadevabuddhamādiṃ katvā yāva porāṇasakyagotamā manopaṇidhivasena, kaṭṭhavāhanajātakaṃādiṃkatvā yāva majjhimadīpaṅkarā vācaṅgavasena majjhimadīpaṅkarapādamūlato paṭṭhāya kāyavācaṅgavasena sabbaṃ sampiṇḍetvā yāva vessantarattabhāvā vīsati asaṅkhyeyyāni pāramiyo pūrentassa sabbaññutaññāṇatthāya yeva alaṅkataṃ sīsaṃ chinditvā dentassa sabbaññubodhisattassa sīsaṃ jambudīpavāsīnaṃ uddhanatopi bahutaraṃ, añjitanayanaṃ uppāṭetvā dentassa nayanaṃ ajaṭākāse gaganatale tārāgaṇatopi bahutaraṃ, hadayamaṃsaṃ vā dakkhiṇabāhuṃ vā chinditvā dentassa maṃsaṃ chanahuta aṭṭhasa hassādhikasatasahassapamāṇasinerurājatopi bahutaraṃ, lohitaṃ uppāṭetvā dentassa ruhiraṃ catūsu mahāsamuddesu udakatopi bahutaraṃ, maddīsadise ca bhariye jālīkaṇhājinasadise ca putte paresaṃ dāsatthāya dentassa gaṇanapathaṃ vītivattā. Evaṃ pāramiyo pūrentasseva.
心中所愿有七阿僧祇,口头发愿有九阿僧祇;
通过身和语两方面四种著称,他达到了佛的境界。
Cintitaṃ sattasaṅkhyeyyaṃ, navasaṅkhyeyya’vācakaṃ; Kāyavācā catukhyātaṃ, buddhattaṃ samupāgamīti.
按照前面所说的方式,还没有成为勇猛者,只是在心里想着要成佛,就经过了七阿僧祇劫。没有成为极勇猛者,仅仅停留在口头发愿上,就经过了九阿僧祇劫。成为极勇猛者之后,以身行和语行两方面圆满修习,就经过了四阿僧祇劫。这四阿僧祇劫应当从燃灯佛足下开始算起。再过十万大劫之后,应当知道内在的波罗蜜已经修满。以须大拏王的身分,行了七种大布施,七次震动大地,去到弯山,把像自己眼睛一样珍贵的两个儿子送给婆罗门做奴隶,第二天又把以婆罗门形象前来的帝释天王——也就是诸天之王——与自己相等的妻子玛蒂也布施出去,在那一生中做了无量福德,然后前往兜率天,在那里住到寿命尽时,再从一万个轮围世界的殊胜诸天处前来。
Jātattakīsotattakiyā vuttanayena asūro hutvā buddhattaṃ cintentasseva sattaasaṅkhyeyyāni vītivattāni. Atisūro ahutvā vācāmattameva nava asaṅkhyeyyāni vītivattāni. Atisūro hutvā kāyaṅgavācaṅgavasena pūrentassa cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni vītivattāni. Imāni cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni dīpaṅkarapādamūlato paṭṭhāya veditabbāni. Satasahassakappamatthake pana ajjhattapāramī pūritāti veditabbā. Vessantarattabhāvena ca sattakamahādānaṃ datvā sattakkhattuṃ pathaviṃ kampetvā vaṅkapabbataṃ gantvā nayanasadise dve putte brāhmaṇassa dāsatthāya datvā dutiyadivase brāhmaṇavaṇṇena āgatassa sakkassa devarañño attasamaṃ maddiṃ nāma bhariyaṃ datvā tasmiṃ bhave aparimeyyāni puññāni katvā tato tusitapuraṃ gantvā tattha yāvatāyukaṃ ṭhatvā dasahi cakkavāḷasahassehi āgantvā devatāvisesehi.
大雄啊,时候到了,请投生入母胎吧。
救度包含天神在内的世间,当觉悟不死之境。
Kālo deva mahāvīra, uppajja mātukucchiyaṃ; Sadevakaṃ tārayanto, bujjhassu amataṃ padanti.
菩萨被诸天劝请后,观察了时间、洲、地方、家族、母亲这五种大观察,便从兜率天去世。当时甘蔗王的儿子们因为害怕善血统被混杂,只和自己的姊妹婚配,甘蔗大王因此说出“贤者们,这些王子确实有能力啊”这句话,菩萨就以这句话为缘起,降生在因此得名“释迦”的诸王之中——也就是净饭大王的正后圣摩诃摩耶夫人的胎中。经过十个月后,在天臂城和迦毗罗卫城之间的蓝毗尼园,从母胎出生。出生那一刻就面朝北方走了七步,说出无畏之语,让父亲向他礼拜。渐渐长大后,在十六岁时享受王位的荣华,在罗睺罗贤者出生那天出家,修了六年苦行,在卫塞月满月日证得无上正等正觉。此后四十五年间,像为天和人编织珍宝花环一样,降下法宝之雨,直到调伏了须跋陀游方者、佛所应作的事都已办完,最后在拘尸那罗末罗族优波跋单娑罗林中,于卫塞月满月日的凌晨,以无余涅槃界般涅槃。
当世间怙主世尊般涅槃时,晚年出家的须跋陀说:“够了,贤友们,不要忧愁,不要悲泣!我们从那大沙门那里得到了善解脱。我们从前老是被他烦扰:‘这对你们许可,那对你们不许可。’如今我们想做什么就做什么,不想做的就不做。”大迦叶留意到这句话,便和七十万比丘中的众首领一起,由僧团上座具寿大迦叶主持,举行了法的结集。此后过了一百年,又见到毗舍离的跋耆子比丘提出十事、造成教法败坏,便在迦兰陀子耶舍长老的策励下,举行了第二次结集。此后,在如来般涅槃后二百余年的第十八年,有一位名叫法阿育的国王,在整个瞻部洲取得了一统天下的灌顶王位,在佛教中兴起了极大的利养恭敬。那些丧失了利养恭敬、乃至连饮食衣着都得不到的外道,因贪图利养恭敬而混入教中出家,各自宣扬自己的邪见,在教法中制造了极大的毒瘤与污垢。当时,在法阿育王登基后的第十七年,目犍连子帝须僧团上座率领七十万比丘中的一千位比丘,于大自恣日破斥了异说,宣讲了《论事》,举行了第三次法的结集。
然而,在清净的、连同义注的佛语依然住世之际,有些比丘却依自己的见解,从圣典和义注中截取文义的影子,制作出种种不同的著作。他们依己见截取文义的影子,作出似是而非的道理,把前人所说的话当作精要来领会,舍弃了经、随顺经的教说和阿阇黎的传规,不将圣典与义注、义注与圣典、以及作为其解释的《显扬心要疏》和其他种种著作互相对照会通,甚至连自己的己见前后也不加以统一,只一味各立己说。在轻重戒事中本应坚守重者时却不坚守重者,有些比丘在河中不作水掷定界便径自行僧事。如此,教法便分裂为二。而这种分裂,比起《憍赏弥犍度》中所说的分裂还要强盛百倍、千倍,因为它是教法败坏的原因。而且这种分裂并不只发生在人间的比丘中——比丘、近事男等人众,乃至护法诸天,以及她们的伙伴、依地而住的诸天,以及她们的伙伴、依树而住的诸天,以及她们的伙伴、住空的诸天,以及她们的伙伴、四大天王的诸天,以及她们的伙伴、三十三天的诸天——如此依朋友辗转相及,六欲天的诸天,以及她们的朋友、梵众天众——如此乃至色究竟梵界,除圣者外,一切凡夫、天与人都随之分裂。由于他们的分裂,便滋生出大量的罪恶。
因此,我要将圣典与义注、义注与圣典互相对照,并把那种种著作合而为一,如同恒河水与耶牟那河水交融不分般融为一体,编造一部名为《清界论》的著作。法王的弟子们啊,请你们谛听、善加作意。
Yāciyamāno kālaṃ dīpañca desañca kulaṃ mātaramevacāti imāni pañca mahāvilokanāni viloketvā tusitapurato cavitvā mahāsammatavaṃsajassa okkākarañño puttānaṃ kusalambhedabhayena bhaginīhiyeva saddhiṃ āvāhakaraṇaṃ sutvā sakyā vata bho rājakumārāti okkākamahārājena vuttavacanaṃ pavattanimittaṃ katvā sakyāti laddhanāmānaṃ rājūnamabbhantare pavattassa suddhodanamahārājassa jeṭṭhamahesiyā sirimahāmāyāya kucchimhi nibbattitvā dasamāsaccayena devadahanagarassa kapilavatthussa ca majjhe lumbinīvane mātukucchito nikkhamitvā jātakkhaṇeyeva uttarābhimukhaṃ sattapadavītihārena gantvā achambhivācaṃ nicchāretvā pitaraṃ vandāpetvā anukkamena soḷasavassuddesikakāle rajjasiriṃ anubhavitvā rāhulabhaddassa jātadivase nikkhamitvā chabbassāni dukkaracariyaṃ caritvā vesākhapuṇṇamadivase anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambujjhitvā pañcacattālīsa vassāni devamanussānaṃ ratanadāmaṃ ganthento viya dhammaratanavassaṃ vassāpetvā yāva subhaddaparibbājakavinayanā katabuddhakicce kusinārāyaupavaṭṭane mallānaṃ sālavane vesākhapuṇṇamadivase paccūsasamaye anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbute bhagavatilokanāthe subhaddena vuḍḍhapabbajitena ‘‘alaṃ āvuso mā socittha mā paridevittha, sumuttā mayaṃ tena mahāsamaṇena, upaddutā ca homa’idaṃ vo kappati idaṃ vo na kappatī’ti. Idāni pana mayaṃ yaṃ icchissāma taṃ karissāma, yaṃ na icchissāma na taṃ karissāmā’’ti vuttavacanaṃ sallakkhetvā gaṇapāmokkhānaṃ sattannaṃ bhikkhusatasahassānaṃ saṅghatthero āyasmā mahākassapo dhammasaṅgītiṃ katvā parisuddhe dhammavinaye tato aparabhāge vassasatassa accayena vesāliyā vajjiputtakā dasavatthūni dassetvā sāsanavipattiṃ karonte disvā āyasmatā yasattherena kākaṇḍakaputtena samussāhiyamāno dutiyasaṅgītiṃ katvā tato aparabhāge tathāgatassa parinibbānato dvinnaṃ vassasatānaṃ upari aṭṭhārasame vasse dhammāsokonāma rājā sakalajambudīpatale ekarajjābhisekaṃ pāpuṇitvā buddhasāsane mahantaṃ lābhasakkāraṃ pavattetvā parihīnalābhasakkārā titthiyā antamaso ghāsacchādanamattampi alabhantā lābhasakkāraṃ patthayamānā sāsane pabbajitvā sakāni sakāni diṭṭhigatāni dīpetvā sāsane mahantaṃ abbudañca malañca pavattesuṃ. Tadā dhammāsokarañño pattābhisekato sattarasame vasse saṭṭhisatasahassa bhikkhūsu sahassabhikkhuṃ gahetvā moggaliputtatisso nāma saṅghatthero mahāpavāraṇāya parappavādaṃ bhinditvā kathāvatthuppakaraṇaṃ desetvā tatiyadhammasaṅgītiṃ katvā parisuddhe dhammavinaye sāṭṭhakathebuddhavacane dharanteva pāḷiyaṭṭhakathāsu atthacchāyaṃ gahetvā attano mativasena nānāganthavisesāni karonti, tesu attanomativasena atthacchāyaṃ gahetvā kāraṇapatirūpakaṃ katvā vuttavacanaṃ sārato sallakkhetvā sutta-suttānulomaācariyavāde muñcitvā pāḷiyā aṭṭhakathaṃ, aṭṭhakathāya ca pāḷiṃ tabbivaraṇabhūtaṃ sāratthadīpaniñca aññāni ca ganthavisesāni asaṃsanditvā attanomatiyāpi pubbāparaṃ asamānetvā vādappakāsanamattameva ṭhapetvā garukalahukesu garukeyeva ṭhātabbepi garuke aṭṭhatvā keci bhikkhū nadiyā udakukkhepaṃ akatvā karonti. Evaṃ sāsane dvidhā bhinnā honti. Idañca bhindanaṃ kosambakakkhandhake bhinnatopi sataguṇena sahassaguṇena balavatarameva sāsanassa vipattikāraṇattā, tathā hi na idaṃ manussaloke bhikkhūnaṃyeva hoti, bhikkhūnaṃ, upāsakamanussānaṃ, ārakkhakadevatānampi, tāsaṃ sahāyakānaṃ bhummanissitadevatānampi tāsaṃ sahāyakānaṃ rukkhanissitadevatānampi tāsaṃsahāyakānaṃ ākāsaṭṭhakadevatānampi, tāsaṃ sahāyakānaṃ cātumahārājikadevatānampi, tāsaṃ sahāyakānaṃ tāvatiṃsadevatānampi, evaṃ mittaparamparavasena chakāmāvacaradevatānampi tāsaṃ mittānaṃ brahmapārisajjānampīti evaṃ yāvaakaniṭṭhabrahmalokā ariyapuggale ṭhapetvā sabbe puthujjanā devamanussā bhinnā honti, tesaṃ bhinnattā bahu ca pāpaṃ pasavati, tasmā pāḷiyā aṭṭhakathaṃ, aṭṭhakathāya ca pāḷiṃ saṃsanditvā tāni tāni ganthavisesāni ca ekato katvā gaṅgodake na yamunodakaṃ viya missitvā ekībhāvaṃ katvā sīmavisodhaniṃ nāma karissāmi, taṃ suṇātha sādhukaṃ manasikarotha dhammarājassa sāvakāti.
在这里,“佛陀出世极为难得”的意思是:佛陀出现于世的时机非常难遇。因为在没有佛陀出世的漫长时期里,众生连“佛”这个名称都听不到,就这样度过了数不清的劫数。至于成佛这件事本身何等艰难,前面已经说过了。
Tattha buddhuppādo dullabho ti buddhassa uppādakālo dullabho tathā hi anuppannakāle buddhe buddhoti saddampi asutvā vītivattānaṃ kappānaṃ gaṇanapathaṃ vītivattā. Buddhakāraṇassa dukkarattaṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva.
因此,出家与受具足戒这两件事,在这里是依据“从彼”(第五格)表示低劣之义,或者表示第五格的含义。佛陀出世极为难得,所以依此而来的出家与受具足戒也同样是难得的,这就是这里的意趣。就像世间某样东西非常昂贵、极难得到,一旦得到之后,与它共同作为助缘的、本身并不值钱的东西,也会被认为很贵重、很贵重、很难得、很难得;同样,因为佛陀出世极其难得,所以依此而来的出家也被说成是难得的。又像在池塘上方,因为七天回旋等缘故而蓄满了水,而在下方某个地方却无法渡过,于是就说只有这个地方难以通过;同样,成佛之因极为难行,所以依此而来的出家与受具足戒也被说成是难行、难得的。否则,连佛陀世尊本人的出家与受具足戒也应当是最殊胜的了。或者,也可以理解为这是以因来代称果的说法。比如“痰块”这个说法:因为森林的因缘,痰在糖块中增盛,人们虽然说“糖块有痰”,但其实是把因中的糖块,安立上果上的痰,然后说“痰糖块”。同样,因为因极为难行,所以在难得的佛陀出世中,依此而来的出家也被安立在以佛陀出世为根本因上,而说“出家难得”。即使在佛陀出世的时候,见到佛陀也仍然很难得,在没有佛出世的时候就更不用说了。而且,从一切时节来看,这是因为第九时节(即无佛时期)的缘故。实际上,当众生投生在边地、无色界、无想天、地狱、饿鬼、畜生等处时,或者虽然投生在中央地区,却是邪见者;或者虽然投生在正见之家,却因为眼耳残缺而身体有缺陷,这些人都没有资格见到佛陀。即使能见到,也只是看见而已。像金翅鸟、龙等众生,在那一生中并不能获得道与果,但在这里是可能获得的。
Tato pabbajā ca upasampadācā tiettha topaccayo lāmakatthe, pañcamyatthe vā. Buddhuppādo dullabho, tamanupabbajjā ca upasampadā ca dullabhāyevāti adhippāyo. Yathā ca loke kiñcideva mahagghaṃ alabhitabbaṃ labhitvā vā tena sahakārīkāraṇabhūtaṃ appagghampi mahagghaṃ mahagghaṃ dullabhaṃ dullabhanti vuccati, evameva atidullabhaṃ buddhuppādaṃ āgamma tamanupabbajitampi dullabhanti vuccati, yathā ca nidiyā uparimabhāge sattāhavaṭṭalikādibhāvena udakapūraṇe heṭṭhā kismiñci ṭhāne tarituṃ avisahantā idameva ṭhānaṃ dukkaranti vuccati, evameva buddhakāraṇassa dukkarabhāve na tamanupabbajjupasampadāpi dukkaraṃ dullabhanti vuccati. Aññathā buddhabhagavato pi pabbajjupasampadabhāvoyeva seṭṭho bhaveyya. Athavā kāraṇūpacāravasenāpi evaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ, yathā semhoguḷoti tathā hi guḷassa pi vanapaccayā semho ussanno, taṃ jano guḷenasemhoti vattabbepi kāraṇasmiṃ guḷe phalabhūtaṃ semhaṃ ropetvā semho guḷoti vuccati, evaṃ kāraṇassa dukkarattā dullabhe buddhuppāde tamanukriyā pabbajjāpi taṃ mūlakāraṇabhūte buddhuppāde ropetvā dullabhā pabbajjāti vuccati. Buddhuppādakālepi buddhadassanaṃ dullabhameva, anuppannakāle pana pageva, sabbakhaṇesu navamakhaṇattā ca tathā hi milakkhudesaarūpabhūmiasaññasattanirayapetatiracchānabhūmīsu jāyamānesu vā majjhimadese jāyamānopi micchādiṭṭhibhūtā vā, sammādiṭṭhikule jāyamānāpi cakkhusota vikalabhāvena aṅgavikalā vā buddhadassanaṃ na arahanti, dassanampi dassanamattameva. Supaṇṇanāgarājādīnaṃ tasmiṃ bhave maggaphalabhāgino na honti, honti cettha.
生在边地的人、无色界众生、身体有残缺的人、生在无想天的人,
有邪见的人、畜生、饿鬼和地狱众生。
这八种无暇,是太阳族佛陀所宣说的。
佛陀出世是其中一种时机,被称为第九。
‘‘Paccantajo arūpino, vikalaṅgo asaññajo; Micchādiṭṭhi tiracchāno, peto nerayikopica. Ete aṭṭhakkhaṇā vuttā, buddhenādiccabandhunā; Buddhuppādo khaṇo eko, navamoti pavuccatīti’’.
这里说的“出家”虽然是通称,但实际指的是沙弥,因为“具足戒”是另外单独说的。沙弥则是通过念三遍“我皈依佛”等,依靠双方清净的方式,安住在沙弥的身份上。十戒只是他们的学处而已。如果不能按巴利文原句诵持,按意思说“这个也受持并奉行”也是可以的。这里没有什么要多说的。具足戒有八种:善来比丘具足戒、皈依具足戒、教诫受持具足戒、问答具足戒、受八敬法具足戒、遣使具足戒、八语具足戒、白四羯磨具足戒。其中,世尊看到一个人具备了成为比丘的因缘,就从染色的粪扫衣中伸出金色的右手,发出梵音说:“来吧,比丘,修梵行,为了彻底终结苦。”话音刚落,那个人的在家形象就立刻消失了。
Pabbajjā ticettha sāmaññena vuttepi sāmaṇerāva adhippetā, upasampadā cāti visuṃ vuttattā. Sāmaṇerā ca nāma buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmityādinā tikkhattuṃ vatvā ubhatosuddhivaseneva sāmaṇerabhūmiyaṃ tiṭṭhanti. Dasasīlāni pana tesaṃ sikkhāpadamattameva. Tāni pāḷivasena asakkonto atthavasena ‘‘idañca samādāya vattehī’’ti ācikkhitumpi vaṭṭatiyeva. Idha vattabbaṃ natthi. Upasampadā pana aṭṭhavidhā honti ehibhikkhūpasampadā, saraṇagamanūpasampadā, ovāda paṭiggahaṇūpasampadā, pañhābyākaraṇūpasampadā, aṭṭhagarudhammapaṭiggahaṇūpasampadā, dūtenūpasampadā, aṭṭhavācikūpasampadā, ñatticatutthūpasampadā cāti. Tattha bhagavā ehi bhikkhubhāvāya upanissayasampannaṃ puggalaṃ disvā rattapaṃsukūlantarato suvaṇṇavaṇṇaṃ dakkhiṇahatthaṃ nīharitvā brahmaghosaṃ nicchārento ‘‘ehi bhikkhu cara brahmacariyaṃ sammā dukkhassa antakiriyāyā’’ti vadati. Tassānantarameva gihiliṅgaṃ antaradhāyitvā.
三衣和钵,以及剃刀、针和绑带;
这些八种资具,对于精勤修行的比丘来说,是适合的。
Ticīvarañca patto ca, vāsi sūcica bandhanaṃ; Parissāvanamaṭṭhete, yuttayogassa bhikkhunoti.
以如此所说的八种资具装饰于身,就像一位百腊长老一样,威仪具足,以佛为老师、以佛为戒师,站在那里礼敬正等正觉者。这就叫“善来比丘具足戒”。因为世尊在最初成道的时候,就是用这种“善来比丘具足戒”来让人受具足戒的。那些人,就是从五群比丘开始,一直到央掘摩罗长老为止。
Evaṃ vuttehi aṭṭhahiparikkhārehi sarīre paṭimuttoyeva vassasatikatthero viya iriyāpathasampanno buddhācariyako buddhupajjhāyako sammāsambuddhaṃ vandamānova tiṭṭhati. Ayaṃ ehi bhikkhūpasampadā nāma. Bhagavā hi paṭhamabodhiyaṃ etasmiṃ kāle ehi bhikkhupasampadāya eva upasampādeti. Tāni pana pañcavaggiyādayo aṅgulimālattherapariyosānā.
三百又一千,再另外还有四十。
有一位聪慧的长老;他们全都是“善来比丘”。
Tīṇisataṃ sahassañca, cattālīsaṃ punāparo; Eko ca thero sappañño; Sabbe te ehi bhikkhukāti.
这些是律藏里说到的善来比丘;至于律藏里没有说到的,则是以三百人为随从的塞拉婆罗门等人。
Ete vinayapiṭake niddiṭṭhaehibhikkhū nāma vinayapiṭake aniddiṭṭhā pana tisataparivāraselabrāhmaṇādayo.
两万七千,再加上三百。
这些人确实都被计算在内,他们全都是“善来比丘”。
Sattavīsa sahassāni, tīṇiyeva satāni ca; Ete hi sabbe saṅkhātā, sabbe te ehibhikkhukāti.
把这些全部合在一起,就是两万八千六百四十一。而称为初菩提的时期,则是二十年。
Taṃ sabbaṃ sampiṇḍetvā aṭṭhavīsasahassāni chasatāni ekacattālīsuttarāni ca honti. Paṭhamabodhica nāmesā vīsativassāni honti.
世尊转动了无上的法轮,让十八俱胝婆罗门饮下不死甘露之后,度过了第一次雨安居。第二、第三、第四次雨安居,他都在王舍城的竹林精舍度过。世尊在阿沙荼月满月那天,在波罗奈仙人堕处鹿野苑度过第一次雨安居;到了颇勒窭拏月,在颇勒窭拏月满月那天抵达王舍城,在频婆娑罗王所建的竹林精舍住了大约一个月;然后在制怛罗月,在两万位漏尽者围绕下前往迦毗罗卫,在八万亲族中间,把尘土撒在那些行为不正的国王头上,让他们礼拜,又降下莲花雨;接着为八万亲族讲了《须大拏本生》;然后来到罗睺罗之母那里,讲了《月紧那罗女本生》;让父亲安立在不来果上;之后又回到王舍城住下。因此说“第二、第三、第四次雨安居是在王舍城竹林精舍度过的”。第五次雨安居,他则在毗舍离住了一次。第六次在摩拘罗山住了一次。或者,那里也有富楼那的故事。关于这件事,有下面这段次第故事。据说在苏那巴兰多国的一个商人村里,有兄弟两人。他们当中,有时哥哥带着五百辆车到外地去,运货物回来;有时是弟弟去。但这一次,哥哥把弟弟留在家里,自己带着五百辆车到各地经商,渐渐到了舍卫城,在祇园不远处停下五百辆车,吃过早饭,在随从围绕下坐在一个舒适的地方。那时,舍卫城的居民吃过早饭,受持了布萨支,穿着整齐的上衣,手里拿着香花等物,一心倾向佛、倾向法、倾向僧,从南门出城,前往祇园。他看见这些人,就问一个人:“他们要去哪里?”那人说:“先生,您不知道吗?世间已经出现了佛、法、僧这三宝,所以大众都去大师那里听法。”他听到“佛”这个字,那声音仿佛穿透皮肤、肌肉,直抵骨髓。于是他在自己随从围绕下,跟着那群人一起去了精舍,站在大众边缘,听大师用甜美的声音说法,心中生起了出家的念头。后来,如来知道时机到了,等大众散去后,他上前礼拜大师,邀请大师第二天应供。第二天,他搭起帐棚,铺好座位,向以佛为首的僧团作了大布施。吃完饭,世尊作了随喜后离去。他吃过早饭,受持布萨支,叫来管库的人,把“这么多货物已经卖出,这么多还没有卖出”全都交代清楚,又说“这份财产交给我弟弟”,把一切都交托出去,就在大师面前出家,一心专注修行。可是当他作意修行时,业处却不现前。于是他心想:“这个地方对我不合适。不如我在大师面前领了业处,回自己家乡去修。”于是他在上午乞食,傍晚从静坐起身后,前往世尊那里,请大师开示业处。大师作了狮子吼后便离去了。富楼那尊者回到苏那巴兰多国,进入名叫正山的地方,到商人村乞食。他的弟弟把他带回家,供养饮食,请求说:“尊者,请不要去别处,就住在这里吧。”他答应了,就住了下来。后来他又去了名叫海山精舍的地方。那里海浪涌来,拍打在铁刺般的岩石上,发出很大的声音。长老作意业处时觉得不安适,就决意让大海安静下来。接着他去了名叫母山的地方。那里鸟群聚集,日夜不停地喧闹。长老想:“这里不安适。”于是又去了名叫摩拘罗园精舍的地方。那里离商人村不太远也不太近,来往方便,僻静少声。长老想:“这里安适。”就在那里布置了夜住处和日住处,修了经行道等,进入雨安居。他就这样在四个地方住过。有一天,就在那次雨安居期间,有五百个商人想:“我们要去对岸的大海。”他们把货物装上船。登船那天,长老的弟弟供养长老饮食,在长老面前受了学处,临走时说:“尊者,大海不可信赖,又有很多危难,请您挂念我们。”说完就上了船。船随着波浪前行,到了一座岛。人们说:“我们吃早饭吧。”就上了那座小岛。那岛上什么也没有,只有一片檀香林。有人敲了敲树,知道是赤檀香,就说:“诸位,我们为了求财才去对岸大海,再没有比这更大的利益了。这檀香哪怕四指宽的一块也值十万金。我们把该搬的货物搬走,再走吧。”他们就那样做了。住在檀香林里的非人很生气,心想:“这些人毁了我们的檀香林,我们要杀了他们。”但又想:“如果把他们全杀了,船上就会满是尸体。不如在海中间把他们的船弄沉。”于是等他们上船走了一会儿,非人就兴起风暴,自己也现出种种可怕的样子。人们害怕,就向各自的神明祈祷。长老的弟弟小富楼那居士站在那儿,一边礼敬长老一边说:“愿我的哥哥做我们的依靠。”据说长老就在那一刻观察,知道他们遭遇了灾难,便腾空而起,出现在他们面前。非人一见长老,就说:“富楼那圣者来了。”纷纷退去。风暴也平息了。长老安慰他们说:“不要怕。”让他们安心后,问:“你们想去哪里?”他们说:“尊者,我们要回自己的家乡。”长老便踩在船板上,决意说:“让这船到达他们想去的地方。”商人们回到家乡后,把这件事告诉妻儿,说:“来吧,我们皈依长老。”五百人连同各自的五百位妇女,一起安立于三皈依,宣称成为近事男。然后他们从船上卸下货物,分出一份给长老,说:“尊者,这是您的一份。”长老说:“我不需要单独的一份。不过,你们以前见过大师吗?”他们说:“尊者,没有见过。”长老说:“那么,用这份财物为大师建一座圆亭吧。这样你们就能见到大师了。”他们说:“好的,尊者。”就用那一份和自己的一份开始建圆亭。据说大师从他们动工那时起就受用了。人们夜里看见光明,都以为“这里有大威神的天神”。近事男们建好圆亭和比丘僧的住处,备好布施的东西,向长老报告:“尊者,我们该做的都做好了,请去邀请大师吧。”长老在傍晚以神通到舍卫城,对世尊说:“尊者,商人村的居民想见您,请您怜悯他们。”世尊默许了。长老知道世尊答应了,就回到自己的家乡。世尊叫来阿难长老:“阿难,明天我们要去苏那巴兰多的商人村乞食。你去给四百九十九位比丘发筹。”长老说:“好的,尊者。”就把这事告诉比丘僧团,说:“要去的人请领筹。”那天,君荼陀那长老最先领了筹。商人村的居民也听说“大师明天要来”,就在村中搭起帐棚,备好布施的地方。世尊清晨料理好身体,进入香室,入果定而坐。帝释的黄石座变热了。他心想“这是怎么回事”,一观察,看见大师要去苏那巴兰多,就叫来毗首羯磨:“贤者,今天世尊要去三百由旬外乞食。你化现五百座尖顶阁,备好在祇园门楼顶上待发。”他照办了。世尊的尖顶阁是四门的,两位上首弟子的是双门的,其余比丘的是单门的。大师从香室出来,进入依次排列的尖顶阁中最前面的一座。以两位上首弟子为首的四百九十九位比丘也进入尖顶阁坐下,剩下一座空的尖顶阁。五百座尖顶阁腾空而起。大师到了名叫萨遮盘陀山的地方,把尖顶阁停在空中。那山上有个名叫萨遮盘陀的持邪见者,他教大众受持邪见,得到很多利养和名声,住在那里。而在他内心里,就像瓮中灯一样,燃着证得阿拉汉的近依因缘。大师看见后,心想“我要为他说法”,就前去说法。那苦行者在开示结束时证得阿拉汉。神通随着圣道一起现起,他成为善来比丘,穿着神变所成的衣钵,进入一座尖顶阁。世尊与进入尖顶阁的五百位比丘一起前往商人村,让那些尖顶阁隐没不现,进入商人村。商人们向以佛为首的比丘僧团作了大布施,把大师和僧众一起迎请到摩拘罗园。大师进入圆亭。大众等到大师用斋的疲劳止息时,已经吃过早饭,受持了布萨支,拿着香花,为了听法回到园中。大师说法。大众获得了从系缚中的解脱,兴起了盛大的佛陀轰动。大师为了摄受大众,在那里住了几天,但黎明仍在大香室升起。他在那里住了几天,又在商人村乞食,让富楼那长老留下
Bhagavā hi anuttaraṃ dhammacakkaṃ pavattetvā aṭṭhārasakoṭibrāhmaṇānaṃ amataṃ pāyetvā paṭhamavassaṃ vasi. Dutiyatatiyacatutthavassesu rājagahe veḷuvanavihāre vassaṃ vasi, bhagavā hi āsāḷhinakkhattapuṇṇamiyaṃ bārāṇasiyā isipatane migadāye paṭhamavassaṃ vasitvā phagguṇamāse phagguṇapuṇṇamiyaṃ rājagahaṃ patvā bimbisāraraññā kārite veḷuvana vihāre ekamāsamattaṃ vasitvā citramāse vīsatikhīṇāsavasahassaparivuto kapilavatthuṃ gantvā asītiyā ñātisahassānaṃ majjhe vippaṭipannānaṃ rājūnaṃ matthake paṃsurajaṃ okiritvā te vandāpetvā pokkharavassañca vassāpetvā tamāgamma asītiyā ñātisahassānaṃ vessantara jātakaṃ kathetvā rāhulamātaramāgamma candakinnarījātakañca kathetvā pitaraṃ anāgāmiphale patiṭṭhāpetvā rājagahameva āgantvā vāsaṃ kappesi, tena vuttaṃ dutiya tatiya catuttha vassesu rājagahe veḷuvanavihāre vassaṃ vasī’’ti . Pañcame pana vesāliyaṃ ekavāsaṃ vasi. Chaṭṭhe makuḷapabbate ekavāsaṃ vasi. Puṇṇo vā tattha. Tatrāyaṃ anupubbikathā sunāparantaraṭṭhe kira ekasmiṃ vāṇijakagāme dve bhātaro. Tesu kadāci jeṭṭho pañcasakaṭasatāni gahetvā janapadaṃ gantvā bhaṇḍaṃ āharati, kadāci kaniṭṭho. Imasmiṃ pana samaye kaniṭṭhaṃ ghare ṭhapetvā jeṭṭhabhātiko pañca sakaṭasatāni gahetvā janapadacārikaṃ caranto anupubbena sāvatthiṃ patvā jetavanassa avidūre pañcasakaṭasatāni ṭhapetvā bhuttapātarāso parijanaparivuto phāsukaṭṭhāne nisīdi. Tena ca samayena sāvatthivāsino bhuttapātarāsā uposathaṅgāni adhiṭṭhāya suṭṭhuttarāsaṅgā gandhapupphādihatthā yenabuddho, yenadhammo, yenasaṅgho, tanninnā tappoṇā tappabbharā hutvā dikkhiṇadvārena nikkhamitvā jetavanaṃ gacchanti. So te disvā ‘‘kahaṃ ime gacchantī’’ti ekaṃ manussaṃ pucchi. Kiṃ tvaṃ ayyo na jānāsi, loke buddhadhammasaṅgharatanāni nāma uppannāni, icceva mahājano satthusantike dhammakathaṃ sotuṃ gacchatīti. Tassa ‘‘buddho’’ti vacanaṃ chavicammādīni chinditvā aṭṭhimiñjaṃ āhacca aṭṭhāsi. Atha attano parijanaparivuto tāya parisāyasaddhiṃ vihāraṃ gantvā satthāmadhurassarena dhammaṃ desentassa parisa pariyante ṭhito dhammaṃ sutvā pabbajjāya cittaṃ uppādesi. Atha tathāgatena kālaṃ viditvā parisāya uyyojitāya satthāraṃ upasaṅkamitvā vanditvā svātanāya nimantetvā dutiyadivase maṇḍapaṃ karetvā āsanāni paññāpetvā buddhappamukhassa saṅghassa mahādānaṃ datvā bhattakiccāvasāne bhagavā anumodanaṃ katvā pakkami. Bhuttapātaraso uposathaṅgāni adhiṭṭhāya bhaṇḍāgārikaṃ pakkosāpetvā ‘‘ettakaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ vissajjitaṃ ettakaṃ pana na vissajjita’’nti sabbaṃ ācikkhitvā ‘‘imaṃ sāpateyyaṃ mayhaṃ kaniṭṭhassa dehī’’ti sabbaṃ niyyotetvā satthu santike pabbajitvā kammaṭṭhāna parāyaṇo ahosi. Athassa kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikarontassa kammaṭṭhānaṃ na upaṭṭhāti, tato cintesi ‘‘ayaṃ janapado mayhaṃ asappāyo, yaṃnūnāhaṃ satthu santike kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā sakaṭṭhānameva gaccheyya’’nti. Atha pubbaṇhasamaye piṇḍāya caritvā sāyanhasamaye paṭisallānā vuṭṭhito bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā kammaṭṭhānaṃ kathāpetvā satthā sīhanādaṃ naditvā pakkami. Atha kho āyasmā puṇṇo sūnāparantaraṭṭhaṃ patvā sammatapabbataṃ nāma pavisitvā vāṇijakagāmaṃ piṇḍāya pāvisi. Atha naṃ kaniṭṭhabhātā sagehaṃ netvā bhikkhaṃ datvā ‘‘bhante aññattha agantvā idheva vasathā’’ti paṭiññaṃ kāretvā vasāpesi. Tato samuddagirivihāraṃ nāma agamāsi. Tattha samuddavīciyo āgantvā ayakaṇṭapāsāṇesu paharitvā mahāsaddaṃ karonti. Thero kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikaronto na phāsuvihāro hotīti samuddaṃ nisaddaṃ katvā adhiṭṭhāsi. Tato mātulagiriṃ nāma āgamāsi. Tattha sakuṇasaṅgho ussanno rattiñca divā ca saddo eko baddho hoti. Thero ‘‘idaṃ ṭhānaṃ aphāsukanti tato makuḷakārāmavihāraṃ nāma gato. So vāṇijagāmassa nātidūro nāccāsanno gamanāgamanasampanno vivitto appasaddo. Thero ‘‘idaṃ ṭhānaṃ phāsuka’’nti tattha rattiṭṭhānadivāṭhāne caṅkamanādīni kāretvā vassaṃ upagacchati. Evaṃ catūsu ṭhānesu vihāsi. Athekadivasaṃ tasmiṃyeva antovasse pañca vāṇijakasatāni ‘‘parasamuddaṃ gacchāmā’’ti nāvāya bhaṇḍaṃ pakkhipiṃsu. Nāvārohanadivase therassa kaniṭṭhabhātā theraṃ bhojetvā therassa santike sikkhāpadāni gahetvā gacchanto ‘‘bhante mahāsamuddo nāma assaddheyyo cānekantarāyo ca, amhe āvajjeyyāthā’’ti vatvā nāvaṃ ārūyhi. Nāvā ūmijavena gacchamānā aññataraṃ dīpaṃ pāpuṇi. Manussā ‘‘pātarāsaṃ karissāmā’’ti dīpake otiṇṇā. Tasmiṃ dīpake aññaṃ kiñci natthi, candanavanameva ahosi. Atheko vā siyā rukkhaṃ ākoṭetvā lohitacandanabhāvaṃ ñatvā ‘‘bho mayaṃ lābhatthāya parasamuddaṃ gacchāma, ito ca uttari lābhā nāma natthi, caturaṅgula mattāpi ghaṭikā satasahassaṃ agghati, saṃhāretabbakayuttaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ hāretvā gacchāmā’’ti. Te tathā kariṃsu candanavane adhivatthā amanussā kujjhitvā imehi amhākaṃ candanavanaṃ nāsitaṃ, ghātessāma ne’’ti cintetvā na imesu ghāṭitesu sabbaṃ ekakuṇapaṃ bhavissati, samuddamajjhe nesaṃ nāvaṃ osīdessāmā’’ti āhaṃsu. Atha tesaṃ nāvaṃ ārūyha muhuttaṃ gatakāleyeva uppādikaṃ upaṭṭhāpetvā sayampi te amanussā bhayānakāni rūpāni dassayiṃsu. Bhītā manussā attano devatā namassanti. Therassa kaniṭṭho cūḷapuṇṇakuṭumbiko ‘‘mayhaṃ bhātā avassayo hotū’’ti therassa namassamāno aṭṭhāsi. Thero pi kira tasmiṃyeva khaṇe āvajjetvā tesaṃ byasanappattiṃ ñatvā vehāsaṃ uppatitvā abhimukho aṭṭhāsi. Amanussā theraṃ disvāva ‘‘ayyapuṇṇatthero ehī’’ ti pakkamiṃsu. Uppādikaṃ sannisīdi. Thero ‘‘mā bhāyathā’’ti tesaṃ assāsetvāva kahaṃ gantukāmatthā’’ti pucchi. ‘‘Bhante amhākaṃ sakaṭṭhānameva gacchāmā’’ti thero nāvaṃ phale akkamitvā ‘‘etesaṃ icchitaṭṭhānaṃ gacchatū’’ti adhiṭṭhāti. Vāṇijā sakaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā taṃ pavattiṃ puttadārassa ārocetvā ‘‘etha theraṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmā’’ti pañcasatāni attano attano pañcamātugāmasatehi saddhiṃ tīsu saraṇesu patiṭṭhāya upāsakattaṃ paṭivedesuṃ. Tato nāvāya bhaṇḍaṃ otāretvā therassa ekaṃ koṭṭhāsaṃ katvā ‘‘ayaṃ bhante tumhākaṃ koṭṭhāso’’ti āhaṃsu. Thero ‘‘mayhaṃ visuṃ koṭṭhāsa kiccaṃ natthi’’. Satthā pana tumhehi diṭṭhapubbo’ti. Na diṭṭhapubbo bhante’ti, tenahi iminā satthu maṇḍalamāḷaṃ karotha. Evaṃ satthāraṃ passissathāti te sādhu bhante’ti tena ca koṭṭhāsena attano ca koṭṭhāsena maṇḍalamāḷaṃ kātuṃ ārabhiṃsu. Satthā kirassa āraddhakālato paṭṭhāya paribhogaṃ akāsi. Tatho manussā rattiṃ obhāsaṃ disvā ‘‘mahesakkhā devatā atthī’’ti saññaṃkariṃsu. Upāsakā maṇḍalamāḷañca bhikkhusaṅghassa senāsanāni ca niṭṭhapetvā dānasambhāraṃ sajjetvā ‘‘kataṃ bhante amhehi attanokiccaṃ, satthāraṃ pakkosathā’’ti therassa ārocesuṃ. Thero sāyanhasamaye iddhiyāsāvatthiṃ patvā ‘‘bhante vāṇijagāmavāsino tumhe daṭṭhukāmā, tesaṃ anukampaṃ karothā’’ti. Bhagavā adhivāsesi. Thero bhagavato adhivāsanaṃ viditvā sakaṭṭhānameva paccāgato. Bhagavā ānandattheraṃ āmantesi ‘‘ānanda sve sūnāparante vāṇijagāme piṇḍāya carissāma, tvaṃ ekūnapañcasatānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ salākaṃ dehī’’ti. Thero sādhu bhante’ti bhikkhusaṅghassa tamatthaṃ ārocetvā ‘‘cārikā salākaṃ gaṇhantū’’ti āha. Taṃ divasaṃ kuṇḍadhānatthero paṭhamaṃ salākaṃ aggahoti. Vāṇijagāmavāsinopi ‘‘sve kira satthā āgamissatī’’ti gāmamajjhe maṇḍapaṃ katvā dānaggaṃ sajjayiṃsu. Bhagavā pātova sarīrapaṭijagganaṃ katvā gandhakuṭiṃ pavisitvā phalasamāpattiṃ appetvā nisīdi. Sakkassa paṇḍukambalasilāsanaṃ uṇhaṃ ahosi. So kiṃ idanti āvajjetvā satthu sūnāparantagamanaṃ disvā visukammaṃ āmantesi ‘‘tāta ajja bhagavā tīṇimattāni yojanasatāni piṇḍācāraṃ gamissati, pañca kūṭāgārasatāni māpetvā jetavanadvāra koṭṭhamatthake gamanasajjāniṃ katvā ṭhapehī’’ti, so tathā akāsi. Bhagavato kūṭāgāraṃ catumukhaṃ ahosi, dvinnaṃ aggasāvakānaṃ dvimukhaṃ, sesānaṃ ekamukhaṃ, satthā gandhakuṭito nikkhamma paṭipāṭiyā ṭhapita kūṭāgāresu dhurakūṭāgāraṃ pāvisi. Dve aggasāvake ādiṃ katvā ekūnapañcabhikkhusatānipi kūṭāgāraṃ gantvā nisinnā ahesuṃ, ekaṃ tucchakūṭāgāraṃ ahosi. Pañcapi kūṭāgārasatāni ākāse uppatiṃsu. Satthā saccabandhapabbataṃ nāma patvā kūṭāgāraṃ ākāse ṭhapetvā tasmiṃ pabbate saccabandho nāma micchādiṭṭhi, so mahājanaṃ micchādiṭṭhiṃ uggaṇhāpento lābhaggayasaggappatto hutvā vasati. Abbhantare cassa antocāṭiyaṃ padīpo viya arahattassa upanissayo jalati, taṃ disvā ‘‘dhammamassa kathessāmī’’ti gantvā dhammaṃ deseti. Tāpaso desanāpariyosāne arahattaṃ pāpuṇi. Maggenevassa abhiññā āgatā, ehi bhikkhu hutvā iddhimayapattacīvaro kūṭāgāraṃ pāvisi. Bhagavā kūṭāgāragatehi pañcahi bhikkhusatehisaddhiṃ vāṇijagāmaṃ gantvā kūṭāgārāni adissamānāni katvā vāṇijagāmaṃ pāvisi. Vāṇijā buddhappamukhassa bhikkhusaṅghassa mahādānaṃ datvā sasatthāraṃ makuḷakārāmaṃ nayiṃsu. Satthā maṇḍalamāḷaṃ pāvisi. Mahājano yāva satthā bhattadarathaṃ paṭippassambheti, tāva pātarāsaṃ katvā uposathaṅgāni samādāya gandhañca pupphañca ādāya dhammasavanatthāya ārāmaṃ paccāgamāsi. Satthā dhammaṃ desesi. Mahājanassa bandhanā mokkho jāto, mahanta buddhakolāhalaṃ ahosi. Satthā mahājanassa saṅgahatthaṃ katipāhaṃ tattheva vasi, aruṇaṃ pana mahāgandhakuṭiyaṃyeva uṭṭhapesi. Tattha katipāhaṃ vasitvā vāṇijagāme piṇḍāya caritvā ‘‘tvaṃ idheva vasāhī’’ti puṇṇattheraṃ nivattetvā antare nammadānadī nāma atthi, tassā tīraṃ agamāsi. Nammadānāgarājā satthu paccuggantvā nāgabhavanaṃ pavesetvā tiṇṇaṃ ratanānaṃ sakkāraṃ akāsi. Satthā tassa dhammaṃ kathetvā nāgabhavanā nikkhami. So ‘‘mayhaṃ bhante paricaritabbaṃ dethā’’ti yāci. Bhagavā nammadānadītīre padacetiyaṃ dassesi. Taṃ vīcīsu āgahāsu pidhiyati vīcīsu gatāsu vivarati, mahāsakkārappattaṃ ahosi. Satthā tato nikkhamma saccabandhapabbataṃ gantvā saccabandhaṃ āha ‘‘tayā mahājano apāyamagge otārito. Tvaṃ idheva vasitvā etesaṃ laddhiṃ vissajjāpetvā nibbānamagge patiṭṭhāpehī’’ti. Sopi paricaritabbaṃ yāci. Satthā ghanapiṭṭhipāsāṇe allamattikapiṇḍamhi lañchanaṃ viya padacetiyaṃ dassesi. Evaṃ sūnāparantaraṭṭheyeva dve cakkaratanacetiyāni yāvasāsanantaradhānaṃ patiṭṭhāpesi. Sattame pana vasse sāvatthiyaṃ kaṇḍambarukkhamūle titthi maddanaṃ karonto yamakapāṭihāriyaṃ katvā dasahi cakkavāḷa sahassehi āgatānaṃ devatānaṃ mātaraṃ kāyasakkhiṃ katvā abhidhammaṃ desente tāvatiṃsabhavane pāricchattakamūle paṇḍukambalasilāyaṃ vassaṃ vasi. Aṭṭhame saṃsumāranagare ekavassaṃ vasi. Navame kosambiyaṃ ekavassaṃ vasi. Tadā bhaddiyo, kimilo, bhagu, ānando, anuruddho, devadatto, cāti cha khattiyā pabbajiṃsu. Tesaṃ vitthāro dhammapade āgato. Dasame pana vasse pālileyyāgāme dakkhiṇavanasaṇḍe bhaddasālamūle pālileyyakena hatthinā upaṭṭhiyamāno phāsukaṃ vassāvāsaṃ vasi. Ekādasame nālandhabrāhmaṇagāme ekavāsaṃ vasi. Dvādasame verañjāyaṃ ekavāsaṃ vasi duccaritassa vipākaṃ anubhavamāno, bhagavatā kira phussassa bhagavato kāle sāvakānaṃ vacīduccaritavasena katupacitassa akusalakammassa tadā laddhokāsavasena upaṭṭhitattā verañjabrāhmaṇena nimantitopi samāno mārāvaṭṭana vasena asallakkhetvā assavāṇijakānaṃ nibaddhavattasaṅkhepena paññattaṃ patthapatthamūlakaṃ yavataṇḍulameva temāsaṃ bhuñjati, vuttañhetaṃ apadāne.
我曾在弗沙佛的教法里,责骂那些弟子;
你们吃大麦吧,不要吃稻米。
因为那个业报,我整整三个月都只能吃大麦。
那时我受婆罗门邀请,住在毗兰若。
‘‘Phussassāhaṃ pāvacane, sāvake paribhāsissaṃ; Yavaṃ khādatha bhuñjatha, māca bhuñjatha sālino. Tena kammavipākena, temāsaṃ khāditaṃ yavaṃ; Nimantito brāhmaṇena, verañjāyaṃ vasiṃ tadāti’’.
因此有这样的话:“在第十二年,他住在毗兰若,只住了一次,当时正在承受恶行的果报。”第十三年,他住在阇利山,只住了一次。第十四年,他在舍卫城给孤独长者的祇园精舍第一次安居。第十五年,为了摄受亲族,他去了迦毗罗卫,只住了一次。第十六年,为了调伏阿罗婆迦夜叉,他在阿伽罗婆城只住了一次。第十七年,他回到王舍城安居。第十八年,他又回到阇利山居住。第十九年也在阇利山那里居住。第二十年,他在王舍城附近可怕的毗沙迦罗树林中安居。应当知道,这二十年是初觉悟后的时期。在这段时间里,他大多只是以“善来比丘”的方式授予具足戒。这是就那些以世尊本人为亲教师和戒师、成为善来比丘的有福之人而说的。至于其他人,比如苏定那等人,虽然还没有成为圣者,但因为对双神变生起信心,在舍利弗长老面前出家;还有五百位比丘,过去在迦叶佛时代曾生为蝙蝠,后来也在那位长老面前出家——从这些情况可以看出,所以这样说:“世尊在初觉悟时,在这段时间里确实只是以善来比丘的方式授予具足戒。”不过,从这以后二十五年间,他在给孤独长者所建的祇园大精舍住了十九年。在毗舍佉以二十七俱胝财富建成的东园,他住了六年。因为顾及两家的德行与伟大,他依靠舍卫城住了二十五年。最后一年,他住在贝卢婆村,生起了临终受,并在那里舍弃了寿命行。这些在这里并不是要说的内容,只是为了让人知道世尊逐年安居的情况才提到的。
Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘dvādasame verañjāyaṃ ekavāsaṃ vasi duccaritassa vipākaṃ anubhavamāno’’ti. Terasame jāliyapabbate ekavāsaṃ vasi. Catuddasame sāvatthiyaṃ anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme jetavanavihāre paṭhamavāsaṃ vasitvā pannarasame vasse ñātijanasaṅgahatthaṃ kapilavatthuṃ gantvā ekameva vāsaṃ kappesi . Soḷasame vasse āḷavakayakkhadamanatthaṃ aggāḷavīnagare ekavāsaṃ vasi. Sattarasame vasse rājagahameva nivattitvā vāsaṃ kappesi. Aṭṭhārasame vasse jāliyapabbatameva nivattitvā vasi. Ekūnavīsatimepi vasse tattheva jāliyapabbatameva vasi. Vīsatime vasse rājagahassa avidūre bhīsanake bhesakalavanasaṇḍe vāsaṃ kappesī’’ti imāni vīsati vassāni paṭhamabodhīti veditabbāni. Etasmiṃ kāle ehibhikkhūpasampadāyaeva upasampādesīti yebhuyyena bhagavantaṃyeva uddissa ācariyupajjhāyaṃ katvā ehibhikkhu bhāvamāpanne puññavantapuggaleyeva sandhāya vuttaṃ, aññesampi ariyabhāvamanāpannānaṃ sudinnādīnaṃ vā yamakapāṭihāriye pasīditvā āyasmato sāriputtattherassa santike pabbajitānaṃ pubbe kassapabuddhakāle vaggulibhūtapubbānaṃ pañcannaṃ bhikkhusatānaṃ therasseva santike pabbajitabhāvassa dissanato tena vuttaṃ ‘‘bhagavā hi paṭhamabodhiyaṃ etasmiṃ kāle ehi bhikkhūpasampadāya eva upasampādesī’’ti. Ito paresu pana pañcavīsativassesu anāthapiṇḍikena kārite jetavanamahāvihāre ekūnavīsativassā vāsaṃ vasi. Visākhāya sattavīsati koṭidhanapariccāgena kārite pubbārāme chabbassāni vasi. Dvinnaṃ kulānaṃ guṇamahattaṃ paṭicca sāvatthiyaṃ nissāya pañcavīsati vassāni vāsaṃ vasi. Antime pana vasse beḷuvagāme vasitvā maraṇantikā vedanā uppajji, āyusaṅkhārossajjanañca tattha akāsi. Imāni idha nādhippetāni, bhagavato vassakkamajānanatthaṃyeva vuttanti.
以三次宣说“我皈依佛”等三皈依语而受具足戒,这叫作皈依受具足戒。
Saraṇagamanūpasampadā nāma ‘‘buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmi’’tyādinā tikkhattuṃ vācaṃ bhinditvā vuttehi tīhi saraṇagamanehi upasampanno.
所谓“领受教诫的具足戒”,就是通过这样的教诫摄受,对大迦叶长老所开许的具足戒。具体内容是:“因此,迦叶,你应当这样学:对上座、新学、中座比丘,要常让猛利的惭愧心现前。迦叶,你确实应当这样学。因此,迦叶,你应当这样学:无论听闻什么与善相应的法,我都要把这一切当作核心,如理作意,全心全意地专注,侧耳倾听来听法。迦叶,你确实应当这样学。因此,迦叶,你应当这样学:我绝不舍弃与喜乐俱行的身至念。迦叶,你确实应当这样学。”
Ovādapaṭiggahaṇūpasampadā nāma ‘‘tasmā tiha te kassapa evaṃ sikkhitabbaṃ tibbameva hirottappaṃ paccupaṭṭhitaṃ bhavissati theresu navesu majjhimesu cāti, evañhi te kassapa sikkhitabbaṃ tasmā tiha te kassapa evaṃ sikkhitabbaṃ yaṃ kiñci dhammaṃ sossāmi kusalūpasañhitaṃ sabbantaṃ aṭṭhiṃ katvā manasikatvā sabbameva cetaso samannāharitvā ohitasoto dhammaṃ sossāmīti, evañhi te kassapa sikkhitabbaṃ tasmā tiha te kassapa evaṃ sikkhitabbaṃ sātasahagataṃ me kāyagatā satiṃ na jahissatīti , evañhi te kassapa sikkhitabbanti iminā ovādapaṭiggaṇena mahākassapattherassa anuññātaupasampadā nāma.
问答式的具足戒,就是索巴咖获得允许而受的具足戒。据说世尊在东园经行时,问沙弥索巴咖:“索巴咖,膨胀想或色想,这些法是义不同、文也不同,还是义相同而只是文不同?”他是就与十种不净相关的问题这样提问的。索巴咖回答了这些问题。世尊称赞了他,然后问:“索巴咖,你几岁了?”他回答:“世尊,我七岁。”世尊心想:“索巴咖,你是和我的一切知智对照之后才回答这些问题的。”于是心生欢喜,允许他受具足戒。这就是问答式的具足戒。
Pañhābyākaraṇūpasampadā nāma sopākassa anuññātaupasampadā, bhagavā kira pubbārāme anucaṅkamanto sopākasāmaṇeraṃ ‘‘uddhumātakasaññāti vā sopāka rūpasaññāti vā ime dhammā nānatthā nānābyañjanā, udāhu ekatthā byañjanameva nāna’’nti dasaasubhanissite pañhe pucchi. So te byākāsi. Bhagavā tassa sādhukāraṃ datvā ‘‘kativassosi tvaṃ sopākā’’ti pucchi. ‘‘Sattavasso ahaṃ bhagavā’’ti, ‘‘sopāka tvaṃ mama sabbaññutaññāṇena saddhiṃ saṃsanditvā pañhe byākāsī’’ti āraddhacitto upasampadaṃ anujānāti, ayaṃ pañhābyākaraṇūpasampadā.
“八说具足戒”是指比丘尼从比丘尼僧团以白四羯磨、再从比丘僧团以白四羯磨——通过这两种羯磨而受具足戒。“白四羯磨具足戒”则是指如今比丘们的受具足戒,这里所指的正是这一种,因为它可以依条件具足或不具足而发生。为什么他被称为“具足戒者”呢?因为由和合僧团、白四羯磨、不可违犯、值得认可而达到了更高的境地、获得了果位,所以叫具足戒者;达到了最殊胜的状态,意思就是这样。因为比起在家身份,沙弥身份就叫殊胜,而比起那个,具足戒身份才是殊胜的。其中,“由和合僧团”是指:在最起码的情况下,对于需要五人僧团才能完成的羯磨,凡是够资格参加羯磨的比丘都已到场,应该表达意愿的人已经带来了意愿,在场的人也没有反对,在这样的羯磨中达到了和合的状态。“白四羯磨”是指:通过三次宣告和一次动议所应完成的。这里虽然动议被说在最前面,但因为三次宣告在意义和文句上没有差别,所以把在意义和文句上有差别的动议算作它们的第四,因此叫“白四羯磨”。“由羯磨”是指由如法的羯磨,也就是由律的羯磨,这是意思。“不可违犯”是指:因为事由、动议、宣告、界场、僧团众都圆满具足,所以不可动摇、不可反对。“值得认可”是指有理由、值得,意思是值得大师教法的认可。通过这些理由达到了最殊胜的状态,这是意思。其中“依条件具足或不具足而发生”是指:受具足戒的羯磨能由事由圆满、动议圆满、宣告圆满、界场圆满、僧团众圆满这五种圆满而成就。其中,事由圆满是指年满二十岁,以及现在具有男子身份。未满二十岁、曾经犯过极重罪、黄门、贼住者、叛离外道者、畜生类、杀母者、杀父者、杀阿拉汉者、污辱比丘尼者、破僧者、出佛身血者、具有男女二根者——这十三种人不是受具足戒的合格事由。其中,“未满二十岁”虽然是一般性的说法,但从离开母胎算起,已满十九岁的男子是受具足戒的合格事由,在此以下不是受具足戒的合格事由。因为在一年的时间里,由冬季、夏季、雨季而有三个季节,所以有三个季节,这里也是如此。
Aṭṭhavācikūpasampadā nāma bhikkhuniyā bhikkhunisaṅghato ñatticatutthena bhikkhusaṅghato ñatticatutthenāti imehi dvīhi kammehi upasampadā. Ñatticatutthakammūpasampadā nāma bhikkhūnaṃ etarahi upasampadā, ayameva idhādhippetā, sampattivipattivasena sambhavato. Kasmā hesa upasampanno nāmāti. Samaggena saṅghena ñatticatutthena kammena akuppena ṭhānārahena uparibhāvaṃ samāpanno pattoti upasampanno, seṭṭhabhāvaṃ pattotiattho tathā hi gihibhāvato sāmaṇerabhāvo seṭṭho nāma, tatopi upasampannabhāvoyeva seṭṭho. Tattha samaggena saṅghenāti sabbantimena pariyāyena pañcavaggakaraṇīye kamme yāvatikā bhikkhū kammappattā, tesaṃ āgatattā chandārahānaṃ chandassa āhaṭattā, sammukhībhūtānañca appaṭikkosanato etasmiṃ kamme samaggabhāvaṃ upagatena. Ñatticatutthenāti tīhi anusāvanāhi ekāya ca ñattiyā kattabbena. Ettha ca kiñcāpi ñatti sabbapaṭhamaṃ vuttā, tissannaṃ pana anusāvanānaṃ atthabyañjanabhedābhāvato atthabyañjanabhinnā ñatti tāsaṃ catutthanti katvā ñatticatutthanti vuccati. Kammenā ti dhammikena kammena, vinayakammenātiattho. Akuppenā ti vatthu ñatti anusāvana sīma parisasampatti sampannattā akopetabbataṃ appaṭikkositabbatañca upagatena. Ṭhānārahenā ti kāraṇārahena, satthusāsanārahenāti attho. Etehi kāraṇehi seṭṭhabhāvamāpannoti attho. Tattha sampattivipattivasena sambhavato ti vatthusampatti ñattisampatti anusāvanasampattisīmasampattiparisasampattivasena pañcahi sampattīhi upasampadakammassa sijjhanatoti attho. Tattha vatthu sampattināma paripuṇṇavīsativassabhāvo idāni purisattabhāvo ca. Unnavīsativassaṃ, antimavatthuajjhāpannapubbaṃ, paṇḍako, theyyasaṃvāsako, titthiyapakkantako, tiracchānagato, mātughātako, pitughātako, arahantaghātako, bhikkhunidūsako, saṅghabhedako, lohituppādako, ubhatobyañjanako, ti ime terasa puggalā upasampadāya avatthu. Tattha ūnavīsativassanti sāmaññena vuttepi mātukucchito nikkhamanato paṭṭhāya ekūnavīsaparipuṇṇo purisapuggalo upasampadāya vatthu, tato oraṃ na upasampadāya vatthu tatho hi ekasmiṃ saṃvacchare hemantagimhavassavasena tiṇṇaṃ utūnaṃ sambhavattā tayo utū honti, honti cettha.
从羯提迦月的白半月之后,经过冬季,到颇求那月的满月为止;
从其黑半月的末尾起,经过夏季,到阿沙离月满月为止。
从雨季那个时期之后,剩下的有二十四个布萨日。
在这其中,有六次是十四日布萨,属于第三和第七个半月。
其余的可知道为十五日布萨,共十八次。
‘‘Kattikantikapakkhamhā, hemaṃ phagguṇapuṇṇamā; Tassanti kapakkhamhā, gimhaṃ āsāḷhipuṇṇamā; Vassakālaṃ tato sesaṃ, catuvīsatūposathā. Cātuddasī cha etesu, pakkhā tatiyasattamā; Sesā pannarasī ñeyyā, aṭṭhārasa uposathāti’’.
这里,从迦底迦月黑分初一日起,到颇求那月满月日为止,这四个月叫作冬季。从颇求那月黑分初一日起,到阿沙荼月满月日为止,这四个月叫作热季。从阿沙荼月黑分初一日起,到后迦底迦月满月日为止,这四个月叫作雨季。这样,一年之中有三个季节。其中,在每一个季节里,每半月的第三日和第七日各算作两次,共有六次十四日布萨;第一、第二、第四、第五、第六、第八日各算作六次,共有十八次十五日布萨。这样,一年之中共有二十四次布萨。在这二十四次布萨中,因为有些十四日布萨合起来只有二十九天,所以一年中少了六天。按这个方式计算,到第十九年时,就成了十八年零六个月。再把菩萨住母胎的十个月加进去,就满了十九年零四个月。然而诸王每过三年就补进一个月,有时连一天也算作一个月,所以在十八年时就已经多了六个月。把这六个月加到前面不足四个月的第十九年上,就完全圆满了二十年零一个月。因此应当知道:从十九岁起,加上住胎的十个月,满二十岁,就是受具足戒的条件。现在说“男身”,是因为如今已没有比丘尼,所以意思是如今只有男性个人才可以受具足戒。这是因为:如果女众出家,正法本来只能住世五百年,但由于制定了八敬法,所以又能再住五百年,这样总共说证得无碍解的正法能住立一千年。而女众智慧低劣、烦恼粗重、根性低下。世尊在初成正觉时,虽然因为大爱道乔达弥接受八敬法而允许了女众受具足戒,但也因此说教法不能久住。因为智慧低劣,女众不能令教法久住;因为烦恼粗重,她们不能按照所制定的学处守护律仪;又因为根性低下,她们即使获得八等至,也不能超越梵众天。这样,因为如今已没有比丘尼,所以说“如今只有男性个人”。站在这一点上,应当知道有四种范畴。也就是说,“因为女众出家,教法只能住立一千年”,这是就证得无碍解的漏尽者说的;此后,就纯观的漏尽者而言又是一千年,就不来者而言一千年,就一来者而言一千年,就入流者而言一千年——这样,通达的正法住立五千年。教理的正法也是同样的年限,因为没有教理就没有通达,但有教理也并非就没有通达。至于出家相状,则在教理隐没之后还会延续很久——应当知道这是依据犍度诵者的观点说的。而《长部义注》中则这样说:“依证得无碍解者住立一千年,依六神通者一千年,依三明者一千年,依纯观者一千年,依巴帝摩卡住立一千年。”这也是依据长部诵者诸长老的观点说的。《增支部义注》中也说:从诸佛般涅槃起,只有一千年能生起无碍解,此后能生起六神通,此后连这些也不能生起时就生起三明;随着时间推移,连这些也不能生起时,就成为纯观者。用同样的方式说到不来者、一来者、入流者。这也是《增支部》中说的。而《相应部义注》中则说:初成正觉时,比丘们证得无碍解;后来随着时间推移,不能再证得无碍解,就成为六神通者;此后连六神通也不能证得,就证得三明;如今随着时间推移,不能证得三明,就只能证得漏尽;连这也不能时,就证不来果;连这也不能时,就证一来果;连这也不能时,就证入流果;随着时间推移,连入流果也将不能证得。既然那些阿阇黎的说法各不相同,就应当认为:这是佛音阿阇黎在各处记录下的那些阿阇黎和诵者各自的观点,否则阿阇黎自己就会有前后矛盾的问题。因为正是佛音阿阇黎把僧伽罗语去掉,用摩揭陀语记录了连同义注的佛语,而不是别的阿阇黎。所以应当认为,只有义注中所说的话才是权威。有人问:这四部尼柯耶的义注不都是经过结集传承的吗?那为什么会有这样的分歧呢?回答:确实如此,但那只是为了阐明某些长老的观点而说的,并不是结集诸长老的定论,所以说只有义注本身的话才是权威。
Ettha ca kattikassa kāḷapakkhapāṭipadato paṭṭhāya yāva phagguṇapuṇṇamā cattāro māsā hemautu nāma. Phagguṇassa kāḷapakkhapāṭipadato paṭṭhāya yāva āsāḷhīpuṇṇamā cattāro māsā gimhautu nāma. Asāḷhakāḷapakkhapāṭipadato paṭṭhāya yāva aparakattikapuṇṇamā cattāro māsā vassautu nāma. Evaṃ ekasmiṃ saṃvacchare tayo utū honti. Tattha ekasmiṃ utumhi pakkhassa tatiyasattamesu dve dve katvā cha catuddasikā, paṭhamadutiyacatutthapañcamachaṭṭhaaṭṭhamesu cha cha katvā aṭṭhārasa pannarasikāti evaṃ ekasaṃvacchare catuvīsati uposathā honti. Imesu catuvīsatuposathesu cātuddasiyā ekūnatiṃsa divasā hontīti katvā ekasaṃvacchare cha ūnā divasā honti. Iminā nayena ekūnavīsatime vasse chamāsādhikāni aṭṭhārasavassāni honti. Tasmiṃ mātukucchimhi nibbattakāle dasamāse pakkhipitvā cattāri māsādhikāni ekūnavīsavassāni paripuṇṇāni. Rājāno pana tiṇṇaṃ tiṇṇaṃ vassānaṃ accayena māsaṃ ākaḍḍhanti , divasena saha māsampi, tasmā aṭṭhārasavasse yeva cha māsādhikāni honti. Taṃ heṭṭhācatumāsādhika ekūnavīsatime vasse pakkhipitvā ekamāsādhikāni vīsativassāni sabbaso paripuṇṇāni honti. Evaṃ ekūnavīsativassato paṭṭhāya gabbhavīso upasampadāya vatthūti veditabbo. Idāni purisattabhāvo ti bhikkhuniyā abhāvato purisapuggalova idāni vaṭṭatīti adhippeto tathā hi mātugāmassa pabbajitatthā pañcavassasatāni saddhammo tiṭṭheyya, paññattattā pana aparāni pañcavassasatāni ṭhassatīti evaṃ vassasahassameva paṭisambhidāppattasaddhammassa patiṭṭhitabhāvo vutto. Mātugāmā ca nāma duppaññā tibbakilesā lāmakā ca. Bhagavatā ca paṭhamabodhiyaṃ ādito paṭṭhāyameva mahāpajāpatiyā gotamiyā aṭṭhagarudhammapaṭiggahaṇena upasampadatte anuññātepi sāsanassa aciraṭṭhitikabhāvo vutto. Duppaññattā itthiyo sāsane ciraṃ na tiṭṭhanti, tibbakilesattā yathā paññatta sikkhāpadānurūpaṃ saṃvarampi rakkhituṃ na sakkonti. Lāmakattāpi tā aṭṭhasamāpattiṃ labhantāpi brāhmapārisajjaṃ nātikkamanti, evaṃ bhikkhuniyā abhāvato idāni purisapuggaloti vuttaṃ. Imasmiṃ ṭhāne ṭhatvā cattāri khettāni veditabbāni tathā hi mātugāmassa pabbajitattā vassasahassameva ṭhassatīti cetaṃ paṭisambhidāppattakhīṇāsavavasena vuttaṃ, tato paraṃ uttaripi sukkhavipassakakhīṇāsavavasena vassasahassaṃ, anāgāmivasena vassasahassaṃ, sakadāgāmivasena vassasahassaṃ, sotāpannavasena vassasahassanti evaṃ pañcavassasahassāni paṭivedhasaddhammo tiṭṭhati. Pariyattisaddhammopi tāniyeva na hi pariyattiyā asati paṭivedho atthi. Nāpi pariyattiyā sati paṭivedho na hoti. Liṅgaṃ pana pariyattiyā antarahitāya ciraṃ pavattissati, idaṃ khandhakabhāṇakānaṃ matena vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana evaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘paṭisambhidāppattehi vassasahassaṃ aṭṭhāsi, chaḷabhiññehi vassasahassaṃ, tevijjehi vassasahassaṃ, sukkhavipassakehi vassasahassaṃ, pātimokkhena vassasahassaṃ aṭṭhāsī’’ti. Idampi dīghabhāṇakattherānaṃ matena vuttaṃ. Aṅguttaranikāyaṭṭhakathāyampi buddhānaṃ parinibbānato vassasahassameva paṭisambhidā nibbattetuṃ sakkonti, tato paraṃ cha abhiññā , tato tāpi asakkontā tisso vijjā nibbattanti. Gacchantekāle tānipi nibbattetuṃ asakkontā sukkhavipassakā honti. Eteneva upāyena anāgāmino sakadāgimino, sotāpannāti vuttaṃ. Idampi aṅguttaranikāye vuttaṃ. Saṃyuttanikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana paṭhamabodhiyaṃ bhikkhū paṭisambhidāppattā. Atha kāle gacchante paṭisambhidā pāpuṇituṃ na sakkhiṃsu, chaḷabhiññā ahesuṃ. Tato chapi abhiññā pattuṃ asakkontā tisso vijjā pāpuṇiṃsu. Idāni kāle gacchante tisso vijjā pāpuṇituṃ asakkontā āsavakkhayaṃ pāpuṇissanti, tampi asakkontā anāgāmiphalaṃ, tampi asakkontā sakadāgāmiphalaṃ, tampi asakkontā sotāpattiphalaṃ. Gacchantekāle sotāpattiphalampi pattuṃ na sakkhissantī’ti vuttaṃ. Yasmā ce te ācariyā bhinnavādā, tasmā tesaṃ ācariyānaṃ bhāṇakānaṃ matameva buddhaghosācariyena tattha tattha likhitanti gahetabbaṃ, aññathā ācariyasseva pubbāparavirodhappasaṅgo siyā ācariyabuddhaghoseneva hi sīhaḷabhāsaṃ apanetvā māgadhabhāsāya sāṭṭhakathaṃ buddhavacanaṃ likhitaṃ, na aññena ācariyena tasmā aṭṭhakathāya vuttavacanameva pamāṇanti gahetabbaṃ. Nanu cattāropi nikāyaṭṭhakathāsaṅgītiṃ ārūḷhā, atha kasmā evaṃ bhinnāti. Saccaṃ, tathāpi kesañci therānaṃ vādappakāsanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Na saṅgāhakattherānaṃ, tasmā aṭṭhakathāvacanameva pamāṇanti vuttaṃ.
曾犯过最严重过失的人,就是犯了波罗夷的比丘,他不能再在教法中获得受具足戒的资格。
Antimavatthuajjhāpannapubbanti pārājikabhikkhu, so abhabbo sāsane upasampadakammassa laddhuṃ.
黄门有五种:灌黄门、嫉黄门、破黄门、无根黄门、半月黄门。
其中,如果有人用口含住他人的男根,被不净之物所染而平息了灼恼,这人就叫灌黄门。如果有人看见他人行淫,心生嫉妒,因这嫉妒生起而平息了灼恼,这人就叫嫉黄门。如果有人被人用手段摘除了睾丸,这人就叫破黄门。如果有人一入胎时就天生没有男根,这人就叫无根黄门。还有些人因为不善业果报的力量,在黑分(下半月)时成为黄门,到了白分(上半月)时灼恼就平息了,这人就叫半月黄门。不过有些人说,有人在黑分时是女人,白分时是男人,这才叫半月黄门——这只是他们自己的看法而已。
在这五种当中,灌黄门和嫉黄门出家不被禁止。破黄门、无根黄门、半月黄门则被禁止。即使在这三种里,半月黄门也只在他成为黄门的那半个月里被禁止出家。这里,在三种注疏(根本注、疏、复注)中都说到:如果在非黄门的半月里出了家,到了黄门的半月就应当灭摈。但有些人说:“在非黄门的半月里出家,如果已经证得烦恼的灭尽,就不应当灭摈。”这只是他们自己的看法。因为黄门证得烦恼灭尽是不可能成立的,而且已经断尽烦恼的人也不可能再成为黄门。在讨论无因结生的地方,不加区分地说黄门是无因结生;而灌黄门、嫉黄门和半月黄门,则是从结生那一刻起就已经是黄门,并不是在生命过程中才变成的——他们是这样说的。正因如此,在解释无因结生时,黄门和天生盲、天生聋等一样,用“天生”这个词特别标出。然而在《第四波罗夷注》中,为了说明不堪任的人,不加区分地说黄门、畜生、二根者这三类事败者是无因结生,他们的生天不被禁止。应当这样理解:这五种黄门,在说到“黄门”时并没有加以区分,只是笼统地说“黄门”,然后说“诸比丘,黄门不应当受具足戒”。
Paṇḍakoticetta pañcavidho hoti āsittapaṇḍako, ussūyapaṇḍako, opakkamikapaṇḍako, napuṃsako, pakkhapaṇḍakoti. Tattha yassa paresaṃ aṅgajātaṃ mukhena gaṇhitvā asucinā āsittassa pariḷāho vūpasamati, ayaṃ āsittapaṇḍako nāma. Yassa paresaṃ ajjhācāraṃ passato ussūyāya uppannāya pariḷāho vūpasamati, ayaṃ ussūyapaṇḍako nāma. Yassa upakkamena bījāni apanītāni honti, ayaṃ opakkamikapaṇḍako nāma. Yo pana paṭisandhiyaṃ yeva abhāvako uppanno hoti, ayaṃ napuṃsako nāma. Ekacco pana akusalavipākānubhāvena kāḷapakkhe paṇḍako hoti, juṇhapakkhe panassa pariḷāhovūpasamati , ayaṃ pakkhapaṇḍako nāma, keci pana yo kāḷapakkhe itthī hoti, juṇhapakkhe puriso, ayaṃ pakkhapaṇḍakoti vadanti, taṃ tesaṃ matimattameva. Etesu āsittapaṇḍakassa ca ussūyapaṇḍakassa ca pabbajjā na vāritā. Opakkamikanapuṃsakapakkhapaṇḍakānaṃ pana vāritā. Tesupi pakkhapaṇḍakassa yasmiṃ pakkhe paṇḍako hoti, tasmiṃyeva pabbajjā vāritā. Ettha ca apaṇḍakapakkhe pabbajitvā paṇḍakapakkhe nāsetabboti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘apaṇḍakapakkhepabbajito sato kilesakkhayaṃ pāpuṇāti, na nāsetabbo’’ti vadanti, taṃ tesaṃ matimattameva, paṇḍakassa kilesakkhayā sambhavato khīṇakilesassa ca paṇḍakabhāvānupapattito ahetuka paṭisandhikathāyañhi avisesena paṇḍakassa ahetukapaṭisandhi katā vuttā, āsitta ussūyapakkhapaṇḍakānañca paṭisandhito paṭṭhāyeva paṇḍakabhāvo, na pavattiyaṃyevāti vadanti. Teneva ahetukapaṭisandhiniddese jaccandha-jaccabadhirādayo viya paṇḍako jātisaddena visesetvā niddiṭṭho. Catutthapārājikasaṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ pana abhabbapuggale dassentena paṇḍakatiracchānagataubhato byañjanakā tayo vatthuvipannā ahetukapaṭisandhikā, tesaṃ saggo avāritoti avisesena vuttaṃ, evaṃ pañcavidhā paṇḍakā te paṇḍakasāmaññena avisesetvā ‘‘paṇḍakāti evameva vatvā paṇḍako bhikkhave na upasampādetabbo’’ti vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
所谓“盗住者”,是指有人自己穿上出家的形相,计入比丘的戒腊,并接受“我是比丘”的认可,又按戒腊长幼接受礼敬。他因为盗取了形相和共住这两样,所以叫“两者俱盗”。如果有人不接受按戒腊长幼的礼敬,只是因为心不清净而盗取形相,就叫“盗形相者”。又如果有人以沙弥的身份,通过说妄语而接受“我是比丘”的认可,并按比丘的戒腊接受礼敬等,那么他因为形相是比丘们给的,所以不算“盗形相者”,但因为盗取了共住,就叫“盗共住者”。这里要知道,即使是“两者俱盗”的人,也是以不清净的心进入了“盗形相者”的范畴。如果沙弥接受年长沙弥的礼敬,或者年幼比丘接受年长比丘的礼敬,这也不是盗住者,因为没有盗取。又如果有人犯了比丘的波罗夷罪,但仍保持比丘的形相,只要他还承认自己是比丘,那么他的比丘身份就仍然存在,不算未受具足戒的人。因此,即使他接受共住,也不是盗住者;他也不会产生与未受具足戒者同宿等罪,也不会因为辱骂而犯波逸提罪。正因如此,律中说:“如果一个人不清净,犯了某一条波罗夷法,而另一个持戒清净、有正见的人,让他先获得许可,然后出于辱骂的意图而说,就犯辱骂波逸提罪。”如果对方没有比丘身份,那就只会犯恶作罪。又如果沙弥以沙弥的形相犯了杀生等五种戒律上的过失,那么他来了之后,应当先灭除他的形相,然后给他皈依和戒律;因为没有盗取,所以也不成为受具足戒的障碍。但如果他是在非时食等事情上犯戒,那就应当让他在僧团中发露过失,说“尊者,我犯了过失,过失追上了我”等,或者给予处罚,然后给他戒律。叛投外道的人则很清楚。
Theyyasaṃvāsako ti yo sayameva pabbajjāliṅgaṃ gahetvā bhikkhuvassaṃ gaṇetvā bhikkhūti paṭiññaṃ sampaṭicchati, yathāvuḍḍhaṃ vandanaṃ sādiyati, so liṅgassa saṃvāsassa ca thenattā ubhayatthenako nāma. Yo pana yathāvuḍḍhaṃ vandanaṃ na sādiyati, asuddhacittavasena liṅgassathenattāliṅgatthenako nāma. Yo vā pana sāmaṇerabhūmiyaṃ ṭhatvā musāvādena bhikkhuti paṭiññaṃ gahetvā bhikkhuvassaggena vandanādiṃ sādiyati, so bhikkhūhi dinnaliṅgattā liṅgatthenako na hoti, saṃvāsassa thenattā saṃvāsatthenako nāma. Ettha ca ubhayatthenakopi asuddhacittena liṅgatthenakeeva paviṭṭhoti veditabbo. Yopi sāmaṇero vuḍḍhasāmaṇerānaṃ vandanaṃ sādiyati, daharabhikkhūpi vuḍḍhabhikkhūnaṃ vandanaṃ sādiyati, sopi theyyasaṃvāsako nāpi hoti, athenattā. Yo vā pana bhikkhupārājikamāpannova bhikkhuliṅge ṭhito yāva paṭijānāti, tāva attheva tassa bhikkhubhāvo, na so anupasampannasaṅkhyaṃ gacchati, tathā hi so saṃvāsaṃ sādiyantopi theyyasaṃvāsako na hoti, so sahaseyyādiāpattimpi na janeti, omasavāde pācittiyañca na janeti teneva ‘‘asuddho hoti puggalo aññataraṃ pārājikaṃ dhammaṃ ajjhāpanno, tañce suddhadiṭṭhi samāno okāsaṃ kārāpetvā akkosādhippāyo vadati āpatti omasavādassā’’ti omasavāde pācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ. Asati hi bhikkhubhāve dukkaṭaṃ vadeyya. Yo pana sāmaṇero sāmaṇeraliṅgeneva pāṇātipātādipañcavidhaṃ silavipattiṃ pāpuṇāti, sopi āgato liṅganāsanāya nāsetvā saraṇasīlaṃ dātabbaṃ, athenattā upasampadāya avatthubhāvampi na pāpuṇāti. Vikālabhojanādikaṃ karontassa pana ‘‘accayo maṃ bhante accāgamā’’tyādinā saṅghamajjhe accayaṃ desāpetvā vā daṇḍakammaṃ vā katvā sīlaṃ dātabbameva. Titthiyapakkantako uttānoyeva.
“畜生”是指任何一个投生为非人的众生。四种恶趣众生都不是受具足戒的合格对象。他们因为结生心低劣,没有能力在教法中出家。如果四种恶趣众生都不是受具足戒的合格对象,那为什么不对其余三种加以说明,而只说“畜生”不是合格对象呢?因为其余三种的不合格情况不明显。事情是这样的:在佛陀住世的时候,有一条投生为畜生的龙,对自己的龙身感到厌烦、羞耻、厌恶。那时这条龙心想:“我用什么办法才能脱离龙身,尽快得到人身呢?”接着这条龙又想:“这些释迦族沙门是依法而行、寂静而行、梵行而住、说真实语、持戒、具有善法的人。如果我在释迦族沙门中出家,就能脱离龙身,很快获得人身。”于是这条龙化作一个青年婆罗门的模样,来到比丘们那里请求出家。比丘们给他剃度,授了具足戒。那时,这条龙和另一位比丘一起住在边境的一座精舍里。有一天,那位比丘在夜里天快亮时起身,在露天处经行。这条龙见那位比丘出去了,就放松下来,睡着了。整座精舍被蛇身填满,蛇躯从窗户伸了出去。那位比丘想“我要进精舍”,推开门,看见整座精舍被蛇身填满,蛇躯从窗户伸出来。看到之后,他吓得大声叫喊。比丘们跑过来,问那位比丘:“贤友,你为什么大声叫喊?”他说:“贤友,这座精舍全被蛇身填满了,蛇躯从窗户伸出来。”那条龙被这声音惊醒,坐在自己的座位上。比丘们问:“贤友,你是什么?”它说:“尊者,我是龙。”比丘们问:“贤友,那你为什么做出这样的事?”于是那条龙把事情告诉了比丘们。比丘们把这件事禀告了世尊。于是世尊以这件事为因缘、为事由,召集比丘僧团,对那条龙说:“你们龙类在这法与律中不能增长。龙啊,你走吧,就在那里,在每半月的第十四日、第十五日和第八日受持布萨。这样你就能脱离龙身,很快获得人身。”于是那条龙心想“原来我在这法与律中不能增长”,痛苦、忧愁,流着泪,发出叫声离开了。然后世尊对比丘们说:“比丘们,有两种情况会让龙暴露自己的本性:当它与同类行淫欲之事时,以及当它放松入睡时。比丘们,这两种情况会让龙暴露自己的本性。比丘们,畜生不应授具足戒;已经受具足戒的,应当灭摈。这就是因为只有畜生的不合格情况是明显的。这里说“两种情况”,是就它在日常生活中屡屡暴露本性而说的。其实龙在五个时候会暴露本性:结生时、蜕皮时、与同类行淫时、放松入睡时、死亡时。有人问:天人不也同样不是受具足戒的合格对象吗?那为什么只说四种恶趣众生不是受具足戒的合格对象呢?确实如此,但因为天人没有能力,而通达的教法仍然住立,为了把这类没有能力的人单独区分出来,才这样说,应当这样理解。因为《善见律毗婆沙》的《大品》义注中会说:“比丘们,‘畜生’——这里无论是龙、金翅鸟青年等中的哪一种,乃至从帝释天王算起,凡是任何非人的种类,在这个意义上都应知道是‘畜生’。”因此说“‘畜生’是指任何一个投生为非人的众生”。这里有人问:如果龙和金翅鸟因为结生心低劣而不能出家,那为什么在《毗输罗本生》中,四个人各自希求龙、金翅鸟、帝释、檀那阇耶俱罗婆的住处,修布施等福业,其中一人在寿命结束时和妻儿一起投生在龙宫成为龙王,一人投生在金翅鸟宫的绵树宫殿成为金翅鸟王,一人投生在三十三天成为帝释,一人投生在檀那阇耶俱罗婆王后的腹中——这四个人的结生都被说成是由善业而生的呢?如果是由善业而生,那么“善的思以业缘为异熟诸蕴和业所生诸色的缘”这条《发趣论》的圣典文句,也就应该说无因结生者在结生刹那也有业缘了;然而不应该这样说,那这该怎么理解呢?回答说:因为他们贪欲强盛,又系属于七种淫欲结合,他们的善思不清净。正因为不清净,就不能生到善趣地。这些业即使转起于恶趣地,在积集业的时候,也是凭借那希求各种投生地的、与渴爱相应的前分思的力量,才投生到那些畜生地中,而不是由其他不善业。只有这样,他们所发的愿望才能实现。如果是由其他不善业而投生,那么所希求的愿望也就落空了。而这贪欲连与强力禅那相应的思都能障碍,比如提婆达多的师父沙门,凭禅那之力本应投生到梵界,却因贪欲障碍了禅那,由其他业只投生在乾达婆天中。“比丘们,持戒者的心愿因清净而成就”,其详细内容见于《长部》,有兴趣的人可以去那里查看。又因为系属于七种淫欲结合,众生不能脱离苦,因为世尊说过:“婆罗门,在此世间,有些沙门或婆罗门自称是正行梵行者,虽然不与女人行两两交合之事,却接受女人的涂身、沐浴、按摩、揉捏,他对此贪着、爱乐,因此感到满足。婆罗门,这也是梵行的缺口、裂隙、斑点、瑕疵。婆罗门,这就叫行不清净的梵行。系属于淫欲结合的人,我说不能解脱生、老、死……乃至不能解脱苦。再者,婆罗门,在此世间,有些沙门或婆罗门自称梵行者,虽然不与女人行两两交合之事,也不接受女人的涂身……却与女人一起嬉笑、玩耍、戏谑,他对此贪着……我说不能解脱苦。再者,婆罗门,在此世间,有些沙门或婆罗门自称梵行者,虽然不与女人交合,也不接受女人的涂身,也不与女人一起嬉笑玩耍戏谑,却凝视、注视女人的眼睛,他对此贪着……我说不能解脱苦。再者,婆罗门,在此世间,有些沙门或婆罗门自称梵行者,既不与女人交合,也不接受女人的涂身,也不注视女人,却隔着墙壁或围墙听女人欢笑、说话、歌唱或哭泣的声音,他对此贪着……我说不能解脱苦。再者,婆罗门,在此世间,有些沙门或婆罗门自称梵行者,既不与女人交合,也不接受女人的涂身,也不注视女人,也不听女人哭泣等声音……却追忆从前与女人一起欢笑、交谈、玩耍的情景,他对此贪着……我说不能解脱苦。再者,婆罗门,在此世间,有些沙门或婆罗门自称梵行者,既不与女人交合,也不接受女人的涂身……也不追忆从前与女人一起欢笑交谈玩耍之事,却看见居士或居士子具足、圆满五种欲乐而享乐,他对此贪着……我说不能解脱苦。再者,婆罗门,在此世间,有些沙门或婆罗门自称梵行者,既不与女人交合……也不追忆居士或居士子享乐之事,却发愿求生某个天众而行梵行,心想‘愿我以此戒、或禁、或苦行、或梵行而成为天或某类天’,他对此贪着、爱乐,因此感到满足。婆罗门,这也是梵行的缺口、裂隙、斑点、瑕疵。”如此应当知道,梵行的缺口等状态,是由以利养等为因的各种破损,以及七种淫欲结合所摄尽的。
Tiracchānagatoti yokoci amanussabhūto cattāro apāyikāpi upasampadāya avatthuyeva. Te paṭisandhiyā lāmakattā abhabbā sāsane pabbajituṃ. Yadi cattāro apāyikā upasampadāya avatthu bhaveyya, atha kasmā sese anapadisitvā tiracchānagatova avatthūti vuttanti. Sesānaṃ apākaṭavatthuttā, tathā hi sambuddhakāle tiracchānayoniyaṃ nibbatto eko nāgarājā nāgayoniyā aṭṭīyati harāyati jigucchati. Athakho tassa nāgassa etadahosi kenanukho ahaṃ upāyena nāgayoniyā parimucceyyaṃ khippañca manussattaṃ labheyyanti. Athakho tassa nāgassa etadahosi ‘‘ime kho samaṇāsakyaputtiyā dhammacārino samacārino brahmacārino saccavādino sīlavanto kalyāṇadhammā sace kho ahaṃ samaṇesu sakyaputtiyesu pabbajeyyaṃ, evāhaṃ nāgayoniyā parimucceyyaṃ khippañca manussattaṃ paṭilabheyya’’nti. Atha kho so nāgo māṇavakavaṇṇena bhikkhū upasaṅkamitvā pabbajjaṃ yāci. Taṃ bhikkhū pabbājesuṃ upasampādesuṃ. Tena kho pana samayena so nāgo aññatarena bhikkhunā saddhiṃ paccantime vihāre paṭivasati. Atha kho so bhikkhu rattiyā paccūsasamayaṃ paccūṭṭhāya ajjhokāse caṅkamati. Atha kho so nāgo tassa bhikkhuno nikkhante vissaṭṭho niddaṃ okkamesi. Sabbo vihāro ahinā puṇṇo, vātapānehi bhogā nikkhantā honti. Athakho so bhikkhu ‘‘vihāraṃ pavisissāmī’’ti kavāṭaṃ paṇāmento addasa sabbaṃ vihāraṃ ahināpuṇṇaṃ vātapānehi bhoge nikkhante. Disvāna bhīto vissaramakāsi. Bhikkhū upadhāvitvā taṃ bhikkhuṃ etadavocuṃ ‘‘kissa tvaṃ āvuso vissaramakāsī’’ti. Ayaṃ āvuso sabbo vihāro ahinā puṇṇo vātapānehi bhogā nikkhantāti. Atha kho so nāgo tena saddena pabujjhitvā sake āsane nisīdi. Bhikkhū evamāhaṃsu ‘‘koci tvaṃ āvuso’’ti. ‘‘Ahaṃ bhante nāgo’’ti. ‘‘Kissa pana tvaṃ āvuso evarūpaṃ akāsī’’ti. Atha kho so nāgo bhikkhūnaṃ etamatthaṃ ārocesī. Bhikkhū bhagavato etamatthaṃ ārocesuṃ. Atha kho bhagavā etasmiṃ nidāne etasmiṃ pakaraṇe bhikkhusaṅghaṃ sannipātāpetvā taṃ nāgaṃ etadavoca ‘‘tumhe khvattha nāgā avirūḷhidhammā imasmiṃ dhammavinaye, gaccha tvaṃ nāga, tattheva cātuddase pannarase aṭṭhamiyā ca pakkhassa uposathaṃ upavasa, evaṃ tvaṃ nāgayoniyā parimuccissasi khippañca manussattaṃ paṭilabhissasī’’ti. Atha kho so nāgo ‘‘avirūḷhadhammo kirāhaṃ imasmiṃ dhammavinayeti dukkhī dummano assūni pavattayamāno vissaraṃ katvā pakkami. Atha kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi ‘‘dve me bhikkhave paccayā nāgassa sabhāvapātukammāya. Yadā ca sajātiyā methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevati, yadā ca vissaṭṭho niddaṃ okkamati. Ime kho bhikkhave dve paccayā nāgassa sabhāva pātukammāya. Tiracchānagato bhikkhave na upasampādetabbo, upasampanno nāsetabbo’’ti evaṃ tiracchānasseva pākaṭavattuttāti. Ettha ca pavattiyaṃ abhiṇhaṃ sabhāvapātukammadassanavasena ‘‘dve paccayā’’ti vuttaṃ. Nāgassa pana pañcasu kālesu sabhāvapātukammaṃ hoti paṭisandhikāle, tacapajahananakāle, sajātiyā methunakāle, vissaṭṭha niddokkamanakāle, cutikāleti. Nanu ca devāpi upasampadāya avatthuyeva, atha kasmā cattāro apāyikāva upasampadāya avatthūti vuttanti. Saccaṃ, tathāpi devānaṃ abhabbattā paṭivedhasāsanassa ṭhitattā te abhabbato visuṃ karaṇatthāya evaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Vakkhati hi samantapāsādikāya vinayaṭṭhakathāya mahāvagge ‘‘tiracchānagato bhikkhaveti ettha nāgo vā hotu supaṇṇamāṇavakādīnaṃ vā aññataro antamaso sakkaṃ devarājānaṃ upādāya yo koci amanussajātiyo sabbova imasmiṃ atthe tiracchānagatoti veditabbo’’ti, tena ‘‘tiracchānagatoti yokoci amanussabhūto’’ti vuttanti. Ettha cāha yadi nāgasupaṇṇā paṭisandhiyā lāmakā bhaveyya, atha kasmā vidhurajātake cattāro janā nāgasupaṇṇasakkadhanañcayakorabyesu bhavanesu taṃ tadeva ṭhānaṃ patthentā dānādīni puññāni karonti, tesu eko āyupariyosāne saputtadāro nāgabhavane nāgarājā hutvā nibbatti, eko supaṇṇabhavane simbalivimāne supaṇṇarājā hutvā nibbatti, eko tāvatiṃsabhavane sakko hutvā nibbatti, eko dhanañcayakorabyarañño aggamahesiyā kucchimhi nibbattīti catunnampi janānaṃ paṭisandhiyaṃ kusalakammeneva pavattabhāvo vutto yadi kusalakammena bhaveyya, ‘‘kusalā cetanā vipākānaṃ khandhānaṃ kaṭattā ca rūpānaṃ kammapaccayena paccayo’’ti imissāpi paṭṭhānapāḷiyā ahetukānampi paṭisandhikkhaṇe kammapaccayabhāvo vutto bhaveyya, na panevaṃ vattabbaṃ atha kathañcidaṃ paccetabbanti. Vuccate, nikantiyā balavattā sattavidhamethunasaṃyogattā ca aparisuddhā tesaṃ kusalacetanā, aparisuddhāyeva sugatibhūmiyaṃ janetuṃ na sakkonti. Duggatibhūmiyaṃ pavattamānāpi kammā yūhanakāle taṃ taṃ bhūmipatthanā taṇhāsampayuttāpubbabhāgacetanā balena tesu tiracchānabhūmīsu nibbattanti, na aññena akusalena. Evañhi patthitapatthanā siddhāpi bhaveyya. Yadi aññena akusalakammena bhaveyya, icchitapatthanāpi asiddhāva bhaveyya. Nikantica nāmesā balavajhānasampayuttacetanāpi paṭibāhituṃ sakkā tathā hi gopakadevadattassa ācariyasamaṇo jhānabalena brahmabhūmīsu anibbattitvā jhānaṃ paṭibāhitvā aññakammena gandhabbadevesuyeva uppajjati ‘‘sīlavato hi bhikkhave cetopaṇidhi samijjhati visuddhattā’’ti tesaṃ vitthāro dīghanikāye āgato, atthikehi tattha oloketabbo. Sattavidhamethunasaṃyogavasenāpi sattā dukkhato na muccanti vuttañhi bhagavatā ‘‘idha brāhmaṇa ekacco samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā sammā brahmacārī paṭijānamāno na heva kho mātugāmena saddhiṃ dvayaṃdvaya samāpattiṃ samāpajjati, api ca kho mātugāmassa ucchādanaṃ nhāpanaṃ parimaddanaṃ sambāhanaṃ sādiyati, so tadassādeti taṃ nikāmeti, tenacavittiṃ āpajjati. Idampikho brāhmaṇabrahmacariyassa khaṇḍampi chiddampi sabalampi kammāsampi. Ayaṃ vuccati brāhmaṇa aparisuddhaṃ brahmacariyaṃ carati. Saṃyutto methunasaṃyogena na parimuccati jātiyā jarāmaraṇena…pe… na parimuccati dukkhasmāti vadāmi. Punaca paraṃ brāhmaṇa idhekacco samaṇovā…pe… paṭijānamāno. Na heva kho mātugāmenasaddhiṃ dvayaṃdvayasamāpattiṃ samāpajjati, na pi mātugāmassa ucchādanaṃ…pe… sādiyati, api ca kho mātugāmena saddhiṃ saṃjagghati saṃkīḷati saṃkeḷāyati, so tadassādeti…pe… dukkhasmāti vadāmi. Punaca paraṃ brāhmaṇa idhekacco samaṇo vā…pe… na heva kho mātugāmena saddhiṃ samāpajjati. Napi mātugāmassa ucchādanaṃ sādiyati. Napi mātugāmena saddhiṃ saṃjagghati saṃkīḷati saṃkeḷāyati. Apica kho mātugāmassa cakkhuṃ upanijjhāyati pekkhati, so tadassādeti…pe… dukkhasmāti vadāmi. Punaca paraṃ brāhmaṇa idhekacco samaṇovā brāhmaṇo vā…pe… na heva kho mātugāmena, na mātugāmassa, napi mātugāmena pekkhati. Api ca kho mātugāmassa saddaṃ suṇāti tirokuṭṭaṃvā tiropākāraṃvā hasantiyā vā bhaṇantiyā vā gāyantiyā vā rodantiyā vā, so tadassādeti…pe… dukkhasmāti vadāmi. Punaca paraṃ brāhmaṇa idhekacco samaṇo vā brahmaṇo vā…pe… naheva kho mātugāmena, napi mātugāmassa, napi mātugāmena, napi mātugāmassa rodantiyā vā…pe… api ca kho yānitāni pubbe mātugāmena saddhiṃ hasitalapitakīḷitāni anussarati. So tadassā deti…pe… dukkhasmāti vadāmi. Punaca paraṃ brāhmaṇa idhekacco samaṇo vā brahmaṇo vā…pe… na heva kho mātugāmena, napi mātugāmassa…pe… na pi yāni tāni pubbe mātugāmena saddhiṃ hasitalapitakīḷitāni anussarati, api ca kho gahapatiṃ vā gahapatiputtaṃ vā pañcahi kāmaguṇehi sahitaṃ samaṅgībhūtaṃ paricārayamānaṃ, so tadassādeti…pe… dukkhasmāti vadāmi. Punaca paraṃ brāhmaṇa…pe… na heva kho mātugāmena…pe… napi anussarati gahapatiṃ vā gahapatiputtaṃ vā paricārayamānaṃ, api ca kho aññataraṃ devanikāyaṃ paṇidhāya brahmacariyaṃ carati imināhaṃ sīlena vā vatena vā tapenavā brahmacariyena vā devo vā bhavissāmi devaññataro vāti, so tadassādeti , taṃ nikāmeti, tena ca vittiṃ āpajjati. Idaṃ kho brāhmaṇa brahmacariyassa khaṇḍampi chiddampi sabalampi kammāsampī’’ti evaṃ lābhādihetukena bhedena ca sattavidhamethunasaṃyogena khaṇḍādibhāvo saṅgahitoti veditabbo.
杀害母亲的人:如果母亲是女人,但不是亲生母亲,而是乳母、女仆、庶母、祖母、姨母,或者虽是亲生母亲,但母亲是非人的女人,那么杀她的人出家不被禁止,也不构成无间业。畜生道的女人和男人结合,也会生下人类的儿子,就像“孔达之子”和“两兄弟长老”那样。他们也是卵生的。同样,在饿鬼道、畜生道、人道这三处,有四种生方式。在人道中,有些众生是化生的,比如大莲花王子等人。卵生的也有,比如“孔达之子”和“两兄弟长老”。详细情况应查阅《锡兰岛史》。这里,“孔达”是指紧那罗女,她的儿子叫“孔达之子”。据说在阿育王时代,一个林中猎人得到了她,她和人一起生活,生了两个儿子。猎人以为“她现在不会丢下孩子走了”,就把她的羽毛衣给了她。她拿到羽毛衣后就跳起来,回到了自己的住处。紧那罗女没有羽毛衣就无法跳走。因此那位苦行者说:“不要把我的羽毛衣给她。”她们的羽毛衣是业缘和时节所生的,就像转轮王的宝轮一样。转轮王能在空中飞行等,是福德者的神通力,没有宝轮、宝象、宝马,他们无法以自己的本性前往。宝轮是转轮王业力所生,即使在大海中央出现,也是业缘时节所生。宝象、宝马则是业缘业所生。鸟类的飞行等是业异熟所生的神通。紧那罗女没有羽毛衣就无法以自己的本性跳走,所以她们的羽毛衣应视为业缘时节所生。有些人说,那就像天人的装饰一样,是结生时一起带来的,这不可信,因为卵生和胎生不可能这样。有些人说,那是后来才做的,这也不合理,因为湿生的众生也有像莲花胎中或竹胎中出生的,比如莲花色婆罗门、莲花女、竹女等人。胎生的则很明显。如果自己身为畜生,杀害了身为女人的母亲,那人也不构成无间业,但因为投生为畜生,所以出家被禁止,他的业很重,属于无间业一类。女人也和畜生结合而怀孕,比如布利达陀的母亲。女人怀孕有八种原因:邪淫、身体接触、衣触、饮不净物、触摸脐部、见色、闻声、嗅香。其中,邪淫方面:苏丁那的前妻因邪淫而怀孕,生下了最后有者、像金像一样的“种子”儿子。有时某些女人在经期,因贪欲炽盛,喜欢男人抓手、拥抱、触摸身体各部分,也会怀孕。这样就是因身体接触而怀孕。乌达夷长老的前妻是比丘尼,她用嘴取了一部分不净物,另一部分和衣服一起放入自己私处,因此怀孕。这样就是因衣触而怀孕。鹿角仙人的母亲是母鹿,在经期来到仙人小便处,连精液一起喝下,因此怀孕,生下了鹿角仙人。这样就是因饮不净物而怀孕。萨摩菩萨的母亲在经期因触摸脐部而怀孕,生下了萨摩童子。曼达比耶和旃陀帕角达的母亲也是这样,在经期因触摸脐部而怀孕。其中,见吉祥女因触摸脐部而生了曼达比耶。旃陀帕角达的母亲脐部被蝎子爬过,因此生了旃陀帕角达。有些女人在经期得不到男人接触,因贪欲而进入内室,像国王的后宫妃嫔一样凝视男人,因此怀孕。这样就是因见色而怀孕。鹤类中没有雄性,它们在经期听到雷声就怀孕。牛有时闻到公牛的气味就怀孕。这样就是因嗅香而怀孕。女人通过这八种原因怀孕。这里,儿子都像父亲,所以布利达陀等人因为依靠持国龙王,所以生为龙。旃陀帕角达因为依靠蝎子,所以生为人,因为没有精液。杀父亲的人也是这样。
Mātughātake pana yena manussitthibhūtāpi ajanikā posā vanikā mātā vā mahāmātā vā cūḷamātā vā janikāpi amanussitthibhūtā mātā ghātitā, tassa pabbajjā na vāritā, na ca anantariko hoti. Tiracchānitthiyopi manussapurisamāgamma manussabhūtaṃ puttaṃ vijāyanti kontaputtā dvebhātikattherā viya tepi hi aṇḍajāyeva, tathā hi petaloke tiracchāne manusse cāti imesu tīsu bhūmīsu catasso yoniyo sambhavanti. Manussesu panettha kecideva opapātikā honti, seyyathāpi mahāpadumakumārādayo. Aṇḍajāpi konta puttā dvebhātikattherā viya. Vitthāro pana sīhaḷavatthusmiṃ oloketabbo. Ettha ca kontāti kinnarī, tassā puttā kontaputtā, sā hi rañño asokadhammarājassa kāle vanacarakena labhitvā manussasaṃvāsamāgamma dve putte vijāyitvā ‘‘idāni dārake pahāya na gamissatī’’ti saññāya vanacarako tassā potthaṃ adāsi, sā potthaṃ labhitvā pakkhanditvā sakaṭṭhānameva gatā kinnariyo hi potthaṃ vinā pakkhandituṃ na sakkonti, teneva tāpaso ‘‘mā potthaṃ assā adāsī’’ti āha. Kammapaccaya utusamuṭṭhānañhi tāsaṃ potthaṃ, rañño cakkavattissa cakkaratanaṃ viya, tathā hi cakkavattino vehāsagamanādi puññavato iddhināma, na tena cakkaratanaṃ vā hatthiassaratanaṃ vā vinā attano sabhāveneva gantuṃ sakkonti. Tattha cakkaratanaṃ rañño cakkavattissa kammabalena nibbattattā samuddamajjhe jāyamānampi kammapaccayautusamuṭṭhānaṃ nāma. Hatthiassaratanāni pana kammapaccayakammasamuṭṭhānāni nāma. Pakkhīnaṃ vehāsagamanādikā kammavipākajā iddhi. Kinnariyo pana potthaṃ vinā attano sabhāvena pakkhandituṃ na sakkonti, tasmā tāsaṃ potthaṃ kammapaccayautusamuṭṭhānanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Keci pana devānaṃ alaṅkārā viya paṭisandhiyā saha āgatoti vadanti, na taṃ paccetabbaṃ, aṇḍajajalābujānaṃ tathā asambhavato. Kecipi pavatti kāle katanti vadanti, tampi ayuttameva, saṃsedajāpi padumagabbhevā veḷugabbhe vā nibbattā pokkharasātibrāhmaṇapadumavatīveḷuvatīdevīādayo viya. Jalābujā pana pākaṭāyeva. Yena sayaṃ tiracchānabhūtena manussitthibhūtā mātā ghātitā, sopi ānantariko na hoti tiracchānagatattā panassa pabbajjā paṭikkhittā, kammaṃ panassa bhāriyaṃ hoti, ānantariyaṃ āhacca tiṭṭhati. Manussitthiyopi tiracchānamāgamma gabbhaṃ janenti, seyyathāpi bhūridattassa mātā itthiyo hi aṭṭhahi kāraṇehi gabbhaggahaṇaṃ hoti - ajjhācārena, kāyasaṃsaggena, coḷaggahaṇena, asucipānena, nābhiparāmasanena, rūpadassanena, saddena gandhenāti. Tattha ajjhācārena sudinnassa purāṇadutiyikā gabbhaṃ gaṇhitvā pacchimabhavikaṃ suvaṇṇabimbasadisaṃ bījakaṃ nāma puttaṃ vijāyi. Kadāci ekaccā utusamaye chandarāgarattā purisānaṃ hatthagāhaveṇigāhaaṅgapaccaṅgaparāmasanaṃ sādiyantiyopi gabbhaṃ gaṇhanti. Evaṃ kāyasaṃsaggena gabbhaggahaṇaṃ hoti. Udāyittherassa pana purāṇadutiyikā bhikkhunī taṃ asuciṃ ekadesaṃ mukhena aggahesi, ekadesaṃ coḷakeneva saddhiṃ aṅgajāte pakkhipi, sā tena gabbhaṃ gaṇhi. Evaṃ coḷaggahaṇena gabbhaggahaṇaṃ hoti. Migasiṅgatāpasassa mātā migī utusamaye tāpasassa passāvaṭṭhānaṃ āgantvā sasambhavaṃ pivi, sā tena gabbhaṃ gaṇhitvā migasiṅgaṃ nāma tāpasadārakaṃ vijāyi. Evaṃ asucipānena gabbhaggahaṇaṃ hoti. Sāmassa pana bodhisattassa mātā utusamaye nābhiparāmasanena gabbhaṃ gaṇhitvā sāmatāpasadārakaṃ vijāyi, evaṃ maṇḍabyassa ca caṇḍapajjo tassa ca mātā utusamaye nābhiparāmasanavasena, tattha ca diṭṭhamaṅgalikāya nābhiparāmasanena maṇḍabyassa nibbatti ahosi. Caṇḍapajjotassa mātu nābhiyaṃ vicchiko pharitvā gato, tena caṇḍapajjotassa nibbatti ahosi. Idhekaccā itthī utusamaye purisasaṃsaggaṃ alabhamānā chandarāgavasena antogehegatāva purisaṃ upanijjhāyati, rājorodho viya, sā tena gabbhaṃ gaṇhāti. Evaṃ rūpadassanena gabbhaggahaṇaṃ hoti. Balākāsu pana purisonāma natthi, tā utusamaye meghasaddaṃ sutvā gabbhaṃ gaṇhanti. Gāvīeva vā kadāci usabhagandhena gabbhaṃ gaṇhanti. Evaṃ gandhena gabbhaggahaṇaṃ hoti. Evaṃ aṭṭhahi kāraṇehi itthiyo gabbhaṃ gaṇhanti. Ettha ca pitusadisāyeva puttā honti, tasmā bhūridattādayo dhataraṭṭhaṃ nāgarājānaṃ paṭicca nāgāyeva honti. Caṇḍapajjotassa pana vicchikaṃ paṭicca manusso jāto, sambhavena ajātattā. Pitughātakepi eseva nayo.
杀阿拉汉的人,如果杀的是非人中的阿拉汉天神,或是人类中其余的任何圣者,都不构成无间业,也不被禁止出家,但业力仍然很强。畜生即使杀了非人中的阿拉汉,也不构成无间业,但业力沉重;又因为本身是畜生,所以被禁止出家。污辱比丘尼和破和合僧这两件事,则是众所周知的。
Arahantaghātako pana amanussa arahantadevataṃ vā manussajātiyaṃ vā avasesaṃ ariyapuggalaṃ ghātetvā anantariyo na hoti, pabbajjāpissa na vāritā, kammaṃ pana balavaṃ hoti. Tiracchāno pana amanussaarahantampi ghātetvā ānantariko na hoti, kammaṃ pana bhāriyaṃ tiracchānagatattā panassa pabbajjā vāritā. Bhikkhunidūsakasaṅghabhedakāni pākaṭāyeva.
不过,如果是有人想伤害如来,拿刀去割如来的皮肤,却没法让血真的流出来——因为如来的身体是不可破坏的——血只在身体内部某个地方汇聚起来;这是因嗔怒而显现、积聚的。这种人会造下大量恶业,属于无间业,也被禁止出家,就像提婆达多那样。但如果是像耆婆那样,为了治病而切开疮口,把脓血排出来,让病人恢复健康,那就不算“出如来血”,反而会积累大量福德,得到像梵天一样的福报,就像耆婆童子那样。
Lohituppādako pana yo tathāgatassa abhejjakāyatāya parūpakkamena cammaṃ chinditvā lohitaṃ paggharituṃ na sakkoti, sarīrassa pana antoyeva ekasmiṃ ṭhāne lohitaṃ samosarati, āghātena patubbanamānaṃ sañcitaṃ hoti, tassa bahu apuññaṃ pasavati, ānantariko ca hoti, pabbajjāpissa vāritā, seyyathāpi devadatto. Yo pana jīvako viya rogavūpasamanatthaṃ phāletvā pūtimaṃsañca lohitañca nīharitvā phāsuṃ karoti, ayaṃ lohituppādako na hoti, bahupuññaṃ pasavati brahmapuññaṃ pasavati, seyyathāpi jīvakokomārabhacco.
两性人又按女、男分为两种。其中,女两性人的女性特征明显,男性特征隐蔽;男两性人的男性特征明显,女性特征隐蔽。女两性人在对女人行男子之事时,女性特征变得隐蔽,男性特征变得明显;男两性人在对男人变成女人状态时,男性特征变得隐蔽,女性特征变得明显。女两性人自己也能怀孕,也能让别人怀孕;而男两性人自己不能怀孕,只能让别人怀孕。这就是他们之间的差别。这里说的“两性”——“性”就是特征的意思。按照“他有两种性”这样的词义分析,应该说成“两性”。那么,一个人是有两种根,还是只有一种根呢?只有一种,不是两种。因为不能说“凡是生起女根的人,就生起男根”,也不能说“凡是生起男根的人,就生起女根”,因为在一个相续中不可能同时受用两种根。而那一种根,在女两性人身上就是女根,在男两性人身上就是男根。如果只有一种根,那“两性”的状态又怎么能成立呢?有人说根是两种特征的因,但他并没有这个因。对此应当说:女根不是男性特征的因,男根也不是女性特征的因,为什么呢?因为它们并非始终存在。因为女两性人当对女人生起贪染时,男性特征就变得明显,女性特征就变得隐蔽;男两性人也是这样。如果那两种根是两种特征的因,那么两种特征就应该始终同时存在,然而并不会同时存在。所以在这里应当得出结论:只有一种根。应当看到,撇开作为特征之因的根不谈,这里两种特征的真正原因其实是贪染之心。因此,女两性人自己也能怀孕,也能让别人怀孕;男两性人能让别人怀孕,自己却不能怀孕,因为只有具足女根的人才能怀孕。不过《库伦达义注》中说:“如果结生时是男相,那么在生命转起时生起女相;如果结生时是女相,那么在生命转起时生起男相。”这种说形相在结生时就生起的说法是不妥当的。为什么呢?因为女相等特征是在生命转起时才生起的,只有根才在结生时生起,形相等并不是在结生时生起。也不能说“根本身就是形相”,因为根和形相的体性不同。就像有种子才有树,没有种子就没有树;同样地,有根才有形相等生起。根好比种子,形相等好比树。同样地,在那些人当中,般哒格等十一种人在这一生中不能进入圣道的决定聚,所以称为无能者。未满二十岁的人和曾经犯过最终罪的人这两种,只是不能受具足戒的对象而已;如果具备近依善根,他们在这一生中仍然能够进入决定聚,所以称为有能者。
Ubbhatobyañjanako pana itthi-purisavasena duvidho tattha itthiubhatobyañjanakassa itthinimittaṃ pākaṭaṃ, purisanimittaṃ paṭicchannaṃ. Purisaubhatobyañjanakassa purisanimittaṃ pākaṭaṃ, itthinimittaṃ paṭicchannaṃ. Itthiubhatobyañjanakassa itthīsu purisattaṃ karontassa itthinimittaṃ paṭicchannaṃ hoti, purisanimittaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti. Purisaubhatobyañjanakassa purisānaṃ itthibhāvaṃ upagacchantassa purisanimittaṃ paṭicchannaṃ hoti, itthinimittaṃ pākaṭaṃ. Itthiubhatobyañjanako sayañca gabbhaṃ gaṇhāti, parañca gaṇhāpeti. Purisa ubhato byañjanako pana sayaṃ na gaṇhāti, paraṃ gaṇhāpeti. Idameva tesaṃ nānākaraṇaṃ. Ubhatobyañjananti cettha ‘‘byañjananti nimittaṃ. Ubhato byañjanaṃ assa atthīti viggahena ‘‘ubhatobyañja’’nti vakkhatha, ekassa dve indriyāni honti, atha ekamevāti. Ekameva na dve, ‘‘yassa itthindriyaṃ uppajjati, tassa purisindriyaṃ uppajjatīti no. Yassa vā pana purisindriyaṃ uppajjati, tassa itthindriyaṃ uppajjatīti noti ekasmiṃ santāne indriya dvayassa paṭisevitattā. Tañca kho itthiubhatobyañjanakassa itthindriyaṃ, purisaubhatobyañjanakassa purisindriyamevāti. Yadi ekameva indriyaṃ, evaṃ ubhatobyañjanakabhāvo kathaṃ siyā. Indriyaṃ byañjanakāraṇanti vuttaṃ, tañca tassa natthīti. Vuccate na itthindriyaṃ purisabyañjanassa kāraṇaṃ, tathā purisindriyampi itthibyañjanakassa, kasmā sadā abhāvatoti, tathā hi itthi ubhatobyañjanakassa yadā itthiyā rattaṃ hoti, tadā purisabyañjanaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti, itthibyañjanaṃ paṭicchannaṃ tathā purisaubhatobyañjanakassapi. Yadi tesaṃ indriyadvayaṃ byañjanānaṃ kāraṇaṃ bhaveyya, sadā byañjana dvayaṃ ekato tiṭṭheyya na pana tiṭṭhati, tasmā ekameva indriyanti niṭṭhametthāva gantabbaṃ. Byañjanakāraṇaṃ indriyaṃ pahāya rāgacittamevettha byañjanadvayassa kāraṇanti daṭṭhabbaṃ, tasmā itthiubhatobyañjanako sayampi gabbhaṃ gaṇhāti, parampi gaṇhāpeti, purisaubhatobyañjanako paraṃ gaṇhāpeti, sayaṃ pana na gaṇhāti, itthindriyasamaṅgisseva gabbhasambhavatoti. Kurundiyaṃ pana ‘‘yadi paṭisandhiyaṃ purisaliṅgaṃ, pavatte itthiliṅgaṃ nibbattati, yadi paṭisandhiyaṃ itthiliṅgaṃ, pavatte purisaliṅgaṃ nibbatī’’ti paṭisandhiyaṃ liṅgasambhavo vutto, so ayuttova. Kasmā, pavattiyaṃyeva itthiliṅgādīni samuṭṭhahanti. Paṭisandhiyameva samuṭṭhāti, na liṅgādīni. Indriyameva liṅganti na sakkā vattuṃ, indriyaliṅgānaṃ bhinnasabhāvattā, yathā ca bīje sati rukkho sambhavati, nāsati, evameva indriye sati liṅgādīni sambhavanti bījasadisañhi indriyaṃ, rukkhasadisāni liṅgādīni evameva tesu puggalesu paṇḍakādayo ekādasapuggalā tasmiṃ yeva bhave niyāmaṃ okkamituṃ na arahanti, tasmā abhabbā nāma. Ūnavīsati antimavatthuajjhāpannapubbā dve upasampadāya avatthumattameva, upanissaye sati tasmiṃyeva bhave niyāmaṃ okkamituṃ arahanti, tasmā bhabbānāma honti.
松、紧、长、短、重、轻,以及鼻音;
关联、限定与解脱,依十种文字智而分别。
‘‘Sithilaṃ dhanitañca dīgharassaṃ, garukaṃ lahukañca niggahitaṃ; Sambandhaṃ vavatthitaṃ vimuttaṃ, dasadhā byañjanabuddhiyā pabhedo’’ti.
要么考量如上所说的十种语音,要么即使不能如此,也不破坏按松音、紧音、自由音、鼻化音所诵出的语音,也不犯恶说,这样诵出,就叫作公告成就。
所谓公告败坏,则是完全不放公告,或者不提及事、僧、人、公告这四种公告对象,以及事后才补立公告,这些就是五种公告过失。
其中,说“某某名字”时,没有提到受具足戒申请者,这叫不提及事。说“尊者,请僧团听我说”时,只说了“尊者,请听我说”而不说“僧团”,这叫不提及僧。说“某某名字的受具足戒申请者”时,没有提到戒师,这叫不提及人。完全不用任何公告语,这叫不提及公告。把第一次羯磨文说完之后才说“这是公告”,或者说“僧团同意”,这样把公告放到后面才提出,叫事后补立公告。
以上就是五种公告过失,叫作公告败坏。远离这些过失的公告,就是具足的公告,叫作公告成就。
Evaṃ vuttaṃ dasavidhaṃ byañjanaṃ apekkhitvā vā evaṃ asakkontenāpi sithiladhanita vimuttaniggahitavasena vuttāni byañjanāni akopetvā vā duruttaṃ vā akatvā vuttaṃ ñattisampatti nāma. Ñattivipatti nāma sabbaso ñattiṃ aṭṭhapetvā vā vatthusaṅghapuggalañattīnaṃ aparāmasanāni pacchā ñattiṭṭhapanañcāti ime tāva pañca ñattidosā. Tattha ayaṃ itthanāmoti upasampadāpekkhassa api akittanaṃ vatthuaparāmasanaṃ nāma. Suṇātu me bhante saṅghoti ettha suṇātu me bhanteti vatvā saṅghoti abhaṇanaṃ saṅghaaparāmasanaṃ nāma. Itthannāmassa upasampadāpekkhoti upajjhāyassa akittanaṃ puggalaaparāmasanaṃ nāma. Sabbena sabbaṃ ñattiyā anuccāraṇaṃ ñattiaparāmasanaṃ nāma. Paṭhamaṃ kammavācaṃ niṭṭhāpetvā esā ñattīti vatvā khamati saṅghassāti evaṃ ñatti kittanaṃ pacchā ñattiṭṭhapanaṃ nāma. Iti ime pañca ñattidosā ñattivipatti nāma. Imehi dosehi vimuttāya ñattiyā sampannaṃ ñattisampatti nāma.
所谓“宣告成就”,就是避开五种宣告过失之后再说羯磨语。这五种过失是:对僧团或个人的不提及、把该听的内容省略掉、在不适当的时候宣告等,共这五种宣告过失。其中,对对象等的不提及,和前面在提案文里说的一样。不过在三种宣告中,无论在哪里,对这些的不提及就只是不提及而已。
如果完全不说羯磨语,只是在四次提案宣读中,或者在羯磨语中间把四个字母读错,或者把某个字母、某个词读得不清楚,从而把该宣告的内容省略掉,这就叫“把宣告省略掉”。因为如此,以松弛、送气、脱离、鼻音的方式,四个字母在羯磨语中间破坏羯磨。其中,在应当说“suṇātu me”(听我说)的松弛处说成“suṇāthu me”,这叫在松弛处送气。在应当说“Bhante”(尊者)处说成“bhante”,这叫在送气处松弛。在应当说“Suṇātu esā ñattī”(听此提案)处说成“suṇantu esaṃ ñattī”,这叫在脱离处鼻音。在应当说“Pattakallaṃ”(适当)处说成“pattakallā”,这叫在鼻音处脱离。如此,这四个字母在羯磨语中间破坏羯磨。即使不破坏这四个字母而说,在应当说某个字母处说另一个字母,这叫说错。在其他六种处——长、短等——在长处说长,在短处说短,如此在各自处只说各自字母,不破坏次第传来的传统,羯磨语应当作。如果不如是作,在应当说长处说短,在应当说短处说长,同样在应当说重处说轻,在应当说轻处说重,或者在应当说联处说定,在应当说定处说联,即使如此羯磨语也不坏。这六个字母不破坏羯磨。这正是诸阿阇梨的共同说法。另有一些人现在说:字母在羯磨语中间破坏羯磨。若如此,则未受具足戒者将占多数,应当考察后接受。或者应当好好学羯磨语。在宣告无机会时,先立初提案,再宣告,这叫非时宣告。如此,由这些过失解脱的宣告,具足名为“宣告成就具足”。如果给无衣钵的人授具足戒,因为宣告“具足衣钵”之故,羯磨不坏,但作羯磨僧团有罪。因此《疑断》中也说:即使衣钵不存在,因为羯磨语宣告“具足衣钵”,不说羯磨坏,只说恶作。如果无戒师而授具足戒,宣告“某某求具足戒,以某某为戒师”,或者向戒师宣告,则成为善受具足戒。不向戒师宣告,则未受具足戒。因为《疑断》将说:“羯磨不坏”——这是即使戒师不存在,对“某某求具足戒,以某某为戒师”之想者,或离去者,或旧戒师,或任何不存在者,以名字在一切处称戒师之故所说。如果确实不称戒师,则成为所说的“不提及个人”的羯磨失坏,因此巴利文中说“无戒师”。如果以僧戒师、众戒师授具足戒,作羯磨僧团有罪,但羯磨不坏。因为《疑断》将说:“以僧为戒师”——此某某为僧团求具足戒者,此某某向僧团乞求具足戒。以僧为戒师——如此以羯磨语只称僧为戒师,这是意思。如此“以众为戒师”在这里也应以“此某某为众求具足戒者”等连接方式理解。即使如此说,羯磨也不坏,因为只说恶作。否则,那人也应说未受具足戒。如果以黄门等未受具足戒者为戒师授具足戒,避开他们,五众等僧团不离手距而满,羯磨不坏,但作羯磨僧团有罪。因此《疑断》中说:“以黄门等为戒师作时,无黄门等而五众等僧团满,羯磨不坏。否则坏。”如果四位阿阇梨一起宣告,这里怎么说?在所有义注中,由两位或三位阿阇梨分别,一人对一人,如此一次应作两三次羯磨语。如果不同阿阇梨、不同戒师,提舍长老对须摩那长老的弟子,须摩那长老对提舍长老的弟子宣告,成为众满者,可以。如果不同戒师,一位阿阇梨,则因“不同戒师”被遮止故,不可以,仅此所说。关于四人的讨论,连羯磨失坏的影子也不见,但也不应作,因为在所有义注中未考察。如果给有装饰物等、长发长须者授具足戒,则成为善受具足戒,之后剃发须、着袈裟衣,可以,因为离十三事,且此处以成就为量。
Anusāvanasampatti nāma vatthu saṅghapuggalānaṃ aparāmasanāni, sāvanāya hāpanaṃ, akāle sāvananti ime pañca anusāvanadose vajjetvā kathanaṃ anusāvanasampatti nāma. Tattha vatthādīnaṃ aparāmasanāni ñattiyaṃ vuttasadisāneva. Tīsu pana anusāvanāsu yattha katthaci etesaṃ aparāmasanaṃ aparāmasanameva. Sabbena sabbaṃ pana kammavācaṃ avatvā catukkhattuṃ ñattikittanameva vā kammavācabbhantarepi cattāri byañjanāni kopetvā vā akkharassa vā padassa vā duruccāraṇaṃ vā katvā sāvanaṃ sāvanāya hāpanaṃ nāma, tathā hi sithiladhanitavimuttaniggahitavasena cattāri byañjanāni antokammavācāya kammaṃ kopenti. Tattha ‘‘suṇātu me ti sithile vattabbe suṇāthu me’’ti vacanaṃ sithile dhanitaṃ nāma. ‘‘Bhante’’ti vattabbe bhanteti vacanaṃ dhanite sithilaṃ nāma. ‘‘Suṇātu esā ñattī’’ti vattabbe ‘‘suṇantu esaṃ ñattī’’ti vacanaṃ vimutte niggahitaṃ nāma. ‘‘Pattakalla’’nti vattabbe ‘‘pattakallā’’ti vacanaṃ niggahite vimuttaṃ nāma. Evaṃ imāni cattāri byañjanāni antokammavācāya kammaṃ dūsenti. Imāni cattāri akopetvā vadantenāpi aññasmiṃ akkhare vattabbe aññaṃ akkharaṃ vadanto duruttaṃ karoti nāma. Itaresu dīgharassādīsu chasu ṭhānesu dīghaṭṭhāne dīghaṃ, rassaṭṭhāne rassamevāti evaṃ yathāṭhāne taṃ tadeva akkharaṃ bhāsantena anukkamāgataṃ paveṇiṃ avināsetvā kammavācā kātabbā. Sace pana evaṃ akatvā dīghe vattabbe rassaṃ, rasse vattabbe dīghaṃ vadati, tathā garuke vattabbe lahukaṃ, lahuke vattabbe garukaṃ vadati. Sambandhe vā vattabbe vavatthitaṃ, vavatthite vā vattabbe sambandhaṃ vadati, evampi kammavācā na kuppati. Imāni cha byañjanāni kammaṃ na kopenti. Idameva ācariyānaṃ samānakathā. Apare pana idāni byañjanāni antokammavācāya kammaṃ dūsentīti vadanti, evaṃ sati anupasampannāva bahutarā bhaveyyuṃ, vīmaṃsitvā pana gahetabbaṃ. Suṭṭhutarā vā kammavācā sikkhitabbā. Sāvanāya anokāse paṭhamaṃ ñattiṃ aṭṭhapetvā anusāvanaṃ akāle sāvanaṃ nāma. Iti imehi dosehi vimuttāya anusāvanāya sampannaṃ anusāvanasampattisampannaṃ nāma. Yadi pattacīvararahitaṃ puggalaṃ upasampādeti, ‘‘paripuṇṇassa pattacīvara’’nti anusāvanāya katattā kammakopo na hoti, kārakasaṅgho pana sātisāro tenevāha vimativinodaniyampi pattacīvarānaṃ abhāvepi’paripuṇṇassa pattacīvara’nti kammavācāya sāvitattā kammakopaṃ avatvā dukkaṭameva vuttanti. Sace anupajjhāyako upasampādeti, ‘‘itthannāmassa upasampadāpekkho, itthannāmena upajjhāyenā’’ti vā upajjhāyaṃ sāveti, sūpasampannova hoti. Upajjhāyaṃ na sāveti nupasampanno. Vakkhati hi vimativinodaniyaṃ ‘‘kammaṃ na kuppatīti idaṃ upajjhāyābhāvepi itthannāmassa upasampadāpekkho itthannāmena upajjhāyenā’’ti matassa vā vibbhamantassa vā purāṇaupajjhāyassa vā yassa kassaci avijjamānassāpi nāmena sabbattha upajjhāyakittanassa katattā vuttaṃ. Yadi hi upajjhāyakittanaṃ na kareyya,’puggalaṃ na parāmasatī’ti vuttakammavipattieva siyā, teneva pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘anupajjhāyakanti vutta’’nti. Sace saṅghupajjhāyena gaṇupajjhāyena upasampādeti, kārakasaṅgho sātisāro, kammaṃ pana na kuppati, vakkhati hi vimativinodaniyaṃ ‘‘saṅghena upajjhāyenā’’ti ayaṃ itthannāmo saṅghassa upasampadāpekkho, itthannāmo saṅghaṃ upasampadaṃ yācati. Saṅghena upajjhāyenā’’ti evaṃ kammavācāya saṅghameva upajjhāyaṃ kittetvāti attho. Evaṃ’gaṇena upajjhāyenā’ti etthāpi ayaṃ itthannāmogaṇassa upasampadāpekkho’ti ādinā yojanā veditabbā. Evaṃ vuttepi kammaṃ na kuppati eva, dukkaṭasseva vuttattā, aññathā so ca puggalo anupasampannoti vadeyyā’ti. Sace paṇḍakādinā anupasampannakena upajjhāyena upasampādeti, te vajjetvā pañcavaggādigaṇo hatthapāsaṃ avijahitvā pūrati, kammaṃ na kuppati, kārakasaṅgho pana sātisāro tena vuttaṃ vimativinodaniyaṃ ‘‘paṇḍakādīhi upajjhāyehi kariyamānesu paṇḍakādikena vināva pañcavaggādigaṇo pūrati, kammaṃ na kuppati. Itarathā kuppatī’’ti. Sace cattāro ācariyā ekato anusāventi, ettha pana kathanti vuccate, sabbaaṭṭhakathāsu dvīhi vā tīhi vā ācariyehi visuṃ visuṃ ekena ekassāti ekappahāreneva dve tisso vā kammavācā kātabbā. Sace pana nānācariyā nānupajjhāyā honti, tissatthero sumanattherassa saddhivihārikaṃ, sumanatthero tissattherassa saddhivihārikaṃ anusāveti, gaṇapūrakā honti vaṭṭati. Sace pana nānupajjhāyā honti, eko ācariyo hoti, natveva’nānupajjhāyenā’ti paṭikkhittattā na vaṭṭatīti ettakameva vuttaṃ. Catunnaṃ pana janānaṃ vicāraṇakathāya nāpi kammavipattichāyā dissati, tathāpi na kattabbameva, sabbaaṭṭhakathāsu avicāritattā. Sace vatthālaṅkārādisahitaparūḷhakesamassuṃ upasampādeti, sūpasampannova hoti, pacchā kesamassuṃ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetuṃ vaṭṭati terasavatthuvimuttattā sampatti yevetthapamāṇattā ca.
现在该讲这首偈颂的注释次第了,它叫“界净”,是汇集各种论典的。
Idāni sīmavisodhaniṃ nāma, nānāganthasamāhanti imissā gāthāya saṃvaṇṇanākkamo anuppatto.
对于一切所知之法,那位大仙既有智慧,又有悲悯。
他甚至在无数众生中,也随自己的喜好而行事。
被那(悲心)激励之后,导师为了比丘们的利益而行;
只要是他所认可的界场,在那里就会产生疑问。
比丘们啊,在地方、在一切处,都有两种疑惑。
典籍也变得不调顺,是因为出于自己的私见。
如果我听到这样的言论,就能保持旁观舍心;
我的出家在殊胜的正觉者教法里毫无果报;
这义理深奥又精微,只有一切知者、战胜一切的人才能了知。
大智慧的舍利弗,也不是大长老所能了知的境界。
你怎么可能有能力,在全知胜者的境界里(行持)?
他们也许会这样来指责我,但大牟尼依然住世。
盛开的大娑罗树,高大如须弥山。
在般涅槃的时候,正觉者这样说道。
阿难,你不要哭,阿难,你不要悲伤。
只有我已经寂灭,而众多佛陀还在住世。
这些八万四千位正自觉者是你的,
他们会教导你:比丘,你已修了福德,你将会成为。
殊胜的义注巴利,安住在一切知者的境界中。
即使正觉者已经涅槃,这世间也并非空无一人。
我这样想过之后,便日夜不停地精进。
只要正觉者还住世,异论就没有立足之地。
破除这种言论,舍弃惯常的见解。
为了正法长久清净,我现在将作解答。
Paññāva sabbañeyyesu, dayā yassa mahesino; Anantesupi sattesu, pavattittha yathāruci. Tāya ussāhito satthā, bhikkhūnaṃ hitakāraṇaṃ; Yaṃ sīmaṃ anujānāti, tattha pañho pavattati. Dveḷhakā saṃsayā honti, dese sabbattha bhikkhavo; Ganthāpi visamā honti, attanomatikāraṇā. Yadi me īdisaṃ vādaṃ, sutvāvupekkhako bhave; Pabbajjā nipphalā mayhaṃ, vare sambuddhasāsane; Gambhīro nipuṇo attho, sabbaññujinagocaro. Sāriputto mahāpañño, therassapi avisayo; Kathaṃ tvaṃ sakkuṇeyyāsi, sabbaññujinagocare; Iti me upavadeyyuṃ, dharateva mahāmuni. Pāliphullo mahāsālo, ucco merunagūpamo; Parinibbānakālamhi, sambuddho iccamabravi. Mā tvaṃ ānanda rodasi, mā tvaṃ ānanda socasi; Ahamekova nibbāyi, dharanteva bahū buddhā. Sambuddhā caturāsīti, sahassāni imāni te; Ovadissanti tvaṃ bhikkhu, katapuññosi hohisi. Vare sāṭṭhakathe pāḷi, ṭhite sabbaññugocare; Nibbutopi sambuddho, asuññova pajaṃ imaṃ. Evāhaṃ cintayitvāna, rattidivaṃ atandito; Dharanteyeva sambuddhe, bhinnavādo avisayo. Taṃ vādaṃ bhindayitvāna, jahitvā vattanomatiṃ; Vissajjissamahaṃ dāni, ciraṃ saddhammasuddhiyāti.
在这里,“清净结界”的意思是:他们要造一部论著,说明舍弃结界失坏、断除结界过失,并显示具足圆满的特征。这里所说的“结界”有十五种。哪十五种?就是:小界、近行界、同住界、不离界、利养界、村界、镇界、城界、内界、水掷界、国界、邦界、王国界、岛界、世界界。其中,“小界”是指为了让出家、受具足戒等僧团事务顺利进行,从大界或村田中划分、界定出来而设立的界。关于它的详细说明,在分为七十二品的《善见律毗婆沙》大品中,以“应先标举界相”等语句已经讲过;在这里即使再说,也会和那里所说的一样,所以不再重复,只把其中某些难懂的地方提出来说明清楚。
这里,如果在上方界域划定的外侧、下方山脚处,有像地道一样穿透山壁而形成的洞窟,那么界不会延伸到外面的洞窟,也不会延伸到洞窟外面下方的山地,界只在洞窟上方。又如果在上方界域划定的内侧、外部下方山脚处,有像地道一样穿透山壁而形成的洞窟,那么界不会延伸到洞窟,也不会延伸到洞窟外侧下方山地,界只在洞窟上方。这个辨析在《除疑》中也已经作过。
“内”是指山的内部,也就是山脚的意思。为了用界域划定来限定这个“内”字,才说“在上方界域划定的外侧”。不过,如果就山脚来说,本来应该说“内侧”,但这里是依据以山顶为界的界相而说“外侧”,应当这样理解。同样,为了限定“外洞”中的“外”字,才说“在上方界域划定的内侧”。“外面界不延伸”中的“外”,是就山脚的洞窟而说的。意思是:在洞窟之外、上方界域划定的下方部分,界不延伸。“界内”的意思是:在洞窟和山脚之内,本该延伸的地方却不延伸。“外面界不延伸”的意思是:这里所谓“界不延伸”,应当理解为,在本该延伸的地方,因为有洞窟,界完全显示为“不延伸”;而它“不延伸”的地方,界只在洞窟上方——如《除疑》所说。另有一些人说:洞窟就像竹管的中空一样,只是空洞而已——这是不对的。
Tattha sīmavisodhani'nti sīmavipattijahanaṃ sīmavipattiṃ pahāya sampattilakkhaṇappakāsakaṃ pakaraṇaṃ karissanti attho. Tattha sīmāti pannarasavidhā sīmā. Katame pannarasa. Khaṇḍasīmā, upacārasīmā, samānasaṃvāsasīmā, avippavāsasīmā, lābhasīmā, gāmasīmā, nigamasīmā, nagarasīmā, abbhantarasīmā, udakukkhepasīmā, janapadasīmā, raṭṭhasīmā, rajjasīmā, dīpasīmā, cakkavāḷasīmā’ti. Tattha khaṇḍasīmā nāma pabbajjupasampadādīnaṃ saṅghakammānaṃ sukhakaraṇatthaṃ mahāsīmāya vā gāmakhette vā khaṇḍitvā paricchinditvā sammatā. Tassāvitthāro ''paṭhamaṃ nimittā kittetabbā''ti ādinā dvāsattatippabhedāya samantapāsādikāya vinayaṭṭhakathāya mahāvagge vutto, idha vuttopi tatheva vutto bhaveyya, tasmā na vakkhāma, duviññeyyaṭṭhānameva kiñciṭhānaṃ nīharitvā pākaṭaṃ karissāma. Tattha sace pana heṭṭhā uparimassa sīmāparicchedassa parato anto leṇaṃ hoti, bahi sīmā na otarati. Athāpi uparimassa sīmāparicchedassa orato bahi leṇaṃ hoti, antosīmā na otaratīti ime dve ekatthā byañjanameva nānaṃ. Ayañhetthatthouparimassa sīmāparicchedassa orimabhāgato heṭṭhā pabbatapāde umaṅgasaṇṭhānena pabbatapasse vijjhitvā leṇaṃ hoti, sīmāparicchedassa parato leṇe ca leṇassa bahibhūte heṭṭhā pabbate ca bhūmibhāge sīmā na otarati, leṇassa upariyeva sīmā hotīti. Tassa uparimassa sīmāparicchedassa orimabhāgato bahibhūte heṭṭhā pabbatapāde umaṅgasaṇṭhānena vijjhitvā pabbatapasse leṇaṃ athāpi hoti, leṇe ca leṇassa parabhūte heṭṭhā pabbate ca bhūmibhāge sīmā na otarati, leṇassa uparibhāge va sīmā hotīti. Esā ca vicāraṇā vimativinodaniyampi katā. Anto ti pabbatassa anto, pabbatamūleti attho. Tameva antosaddaṃ sīmāparicchedena visesetuṃ ‘‘uparimassa sīmāparicchedassa parato’’ti vuttaṃ. Pabbatapādaṃ pana apekkhitvā ‘‘orato’’ti vattabbepi sīmānissayaṃ pabbataggaṃ sandhāya ‘‘parato’’ti vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ teneva bahileṇanti ettha bahisaddaṃ visesento ‘‘uparimassa sīmāparicchedassa orato’’ti āha. Bahi sīmā na otaratīti ettha bahī ti pabbatapādeleṇaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Leṇassa bahibhūte upari sīmāparicchedassa heṭṭhābhāge sīmā na otaratīti attho. Antosīmāti leṇassa ca pabbatapādassa ca anto attano otaraṇārahaṭṭhāne na otaratīti attho. Bahi sīmā na otaratīti attho, sīmā na otaratī ti cettha attano otaraṇārahaṭṭhāne leṇabhāvena sīmā sabbathā ‘‘anotaraṇameva dassitanti gahetabbaṃ. Tattha pi anotaraṇanti uparieva sīmā hotī’’ti vimativinodanī. Keci pana veḷususiro viya susirameva leṇanti vadanti, taṃ ayuttaṃ.
所谓“近行界”,是指依据村落、森林、市镇等,一直到梵天世界,对各个众生的住处、天宫、宫殿、树木等而言,凡是适合作为近行处的地方,就是近行界。但这里所说的并不是那种近行界,因为那不是比丘们的活动范围。然而,如果划出某一区域,建成寺院,用围墙等围起来,或者即使没有围起来,但划定了适合作为近行处的地方,比丘们住在那里,这才叫作近行界。因为这是比丘们入雨安居和铺设迦絺那衣的地方,所以这样说。也正因如此,说到“迦絺那衣铺设界”时,是指近行界而言;而在“分界”中,则没有在那里生起的〔衣〕,这一点在三处注解中都有说明。所谓“由那里生起”,是说由寺院所属的田地、地产等带来的某些僧团衣物生起,那些衣物只属于铺设迦絺那衣的比丘们——应当这样理解。“田地、地产等”中的“等”字,据《大义注》所说,还包括死者遗物、为僧团而布施的衣物,或由僧团所得之物。在那种近行界中现起的衣物,全部包括在内。正因如此,在“那时,某位在家信徒为僧团建了一座寺院,他想在寺院建成后,向双方僧团布施非时衣。那时,双方僧团已经铺设了迦絺那衣。于是那位在家信徒来到僧团,请求撤除迦絺那衣”这个事例中,为了止息迦絺那衣的利益,世尊制定了撤除迦絺那衣的规定。也正因如此,偷兰难陀比丘尼不肯放弃那份利益,说“衣物将是我们的”,而阻止撤除迦絺那衣。因此,在迦絺那衣铺设界中,只要迦絺那衣尚未撤除,直到颇勒窭那月满月为止的五个月期间,无论是死者遗物,还是为四方僧团而布施的亡者亲属之物,或是因乞食规定、或是因寺院大事务等,以任何方式布施给僧团的衣物,这一切都只属于铺设迦絺那衣的比丘们。它不属于破雨安居者、后入安居者、或来到那里的界内比丘们。如果他们在不知情的情况下拿了,也应当归还。如果他们把那些衣物换成米等可嚼食、可食用的食物,其他人也同样有份。为什么呢?因为利益的因由已经消失。正因如此,为了补足人数而前来的、破雨安居者、后入安居者、或在别的寺院住过雨安居者,都能得到可嚼食、可食用等物。至于迦絺那衣铺设布施的羯磨文,则只在分界中才适用。如果那座寺院没有分界,就必须在别的寺院已结的界中,或在水掷界等处举行。
Upacārasīmā nāma gāmāraññanigamādivasā yāva brahmalokā tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānaṃ nivāsagehassa vā devavimānakapparukkhādīnaṃ vā upacārārahaṭṭhānameva upacārasīmā te idha nādhippetā, bhikkhūnaṃ avisayatāya . Yaṃ pana padesaṃ paricchinditvā pariveṇaṃ katvā pākārādiparikkhittaṃ vā katvā aparikkhittepi upacārārahaṭṭhānaṃ paricchinditvā vā yasmiṃ padese bhikkhū vasanti, ayameva upacārasīmāti adhippetā. Bhikkhūnaṃ vassūpagamanakathinatthārakaraṇaṭṭhānattā, tathā hi ‘‘kathinatthatasīmāya’’nti upacārasīmaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, khandhasīmāya tatruppādābhāvatoti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Tatruppādenā bhatanti vihārasantakena khettavatthuādinā ābhataṃ kiñci saṅghikaṃ cīvaraṃ uppajjati, taṃ tesaṃ kathinatthārakabhikkhūnaṃ yeva bhavissatīti yojanā kātabbā. Khettavatthuādinā ti ettha ādisaddena matakacīvaraṃ vā hotu saṃghaṃ uddissa dinnaṃ vā saṅghikena vā ti mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Tasmiṃ upacārasīme pavattacīvaraṃ sabbaṃ saṅgaṇhāti, teneva ‘‘tena kho pana samayena aññatarena upāsakena saṅghaṃ uddissa vihāro kārito hoti, so tassa vihārassa kate ubhatosaṅghassa akālacīvaraṃ dātukāmo hoti. Tena kho pana samayena ubhatosaṅghassa kathinaṃ atthataṃ hoti. Atha kho so upāsako saṅghaṃ upasaṅkamitvā kathinuddhāraṃ yācī’’ti imasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ ānisaṃsapasambhanatthaṃ kathinuddhāraṃ bhagavatā paññattaṃ, teneva thullanandā bhikkhunī ānisaṃsaṃ appaṭippassambhentā cīvaraṃ amhākaṃ bhavissatīti kathinuddhāraṃ paṭibāhi, tasmā kathinatthatasīmāyaṃ anuddhaṭe kathine yāva phagguṇapuṇṇamā pañca māsā etthantare matakacīvaraṃ vā hotu cātuddisaṃ saṅghaṃ uddissa matānaṃ ñātijanānaṃ vā, bhikkhāpaññattiyā vā vihāramahādikiccena vā yenakenaci ākārena saṅghikaṃ cīvaraṃ dinnaṃ hoti, taṃ sabbaṃ tesaṃ kathinatthārakabhikkhūnaṃyeva hoti. Chinnavassānaṃ vā pacchimikāya upagatānaṃ vā tattha sampattānaṃ sīmaṭṭhakabhikkhūnaṃ vā na hoti. Ajānitvā ce gaṇhanti dātabbameva. Yadi taṃ cīvaraṃ taṇḍulādikhādanīyabhojanaṃ karoti, itaresampi hotiyeva. Kasmāti ce ānisaṃsa vigatattā. Teneva gaṇapūraṇavasena sampattānaṃ chinnaṃ vassānaṃ vā pacchimikāya upagatānaṃ vā aññasmiṃ vihāre vutthavassanaṃ vā khādanīyabhojanīyādīni pāpuṇanti. Kathinatthatasāṭakassa dānakammavācā pana khaṇḍasīmāyameva vaṭṭasi. Tasmiṃ vihāre asati aññavihāre baddhasīmāya vā udakukkhepasīmādīsu vā kātabbameva.
如果有人问:为什么?因为住在那个精舍里先到的比丘们不擅长铺设迦絺那衣。应当去寻找擅长铺设迦絺那衣的持诵犍度长老,把他们请来。让他们诵完羯磨语,铺设好迦絺那衣,受用布施后再离去,而功德利益则归于其他人。这是因为在其他界内的比丘也诵羯磨语这一点,在义注中已有说明。破了雨安居后后到的比丘,或者在别的精舍住满雨安居的比丘,对于先到者来说,只是凑足人数而已,功德利益只属于原来那些人。即使那些破了雨安居等的比丘随喜,迦絺那衣的铺设也算被破坏了,这一点在义注中已有讨论。另有一些人说“迦絺那衣铺设的界限是指近行界”,因此他们只在近行界里做迦絺那衣铺设的告白,这是不合理的,因为很难把它清理干净。就像在近行界里,进了村落界限,比丘们在那里落脚,谁能在那里搬石头或者划出外界呢?用“迦絺那衣铺设的界限”这个词,说的只是迦絺那衣铺设本身,不是迦絺那衣布施的羯磨语,而那项讨论应当通过四种业来阐明。其中:告白业、单白业、白二业、白四业。其中,告白业是指:清理界内的僧众,收取应取欲者的欲,在全体僧众同意下宣告僧众,念三遍“僧众是否同意”,然后执行。单白业是指:按上述方式,在全体僧众同意下,以一次告白执行的业。白二业是指:按上述方式,在全体僧众同意下,以一次告白和一次宣告,即如此以白二宣告执行的业。白四业是指:按上述方式,在全体僧众同意下,以一次告白和三次宣告,即如此以白四的三次宣告执行的业。其中,告白业只适用于分果实等轻业。在迦絺那衣布施中,如果迦絺那衣尚未铺设,得到许多有利益的衣布后,应当用那块布来铺设,不需要再诵羯磨语,布施之事应以告白业经僧众同意而给予。迦絺那衣布施的羯磨语一次就够了,不需要再诵羯磨语。单白业则是在结集法藏时,大迦叶长老等自己推举自己时,只适用于轻业。白二业则包括:结界、撤界、迦絺那布施、迦絺那衣的撤销、房舍地点的指示、精舍地点的指示,这六种重业不能先告白再做,必须诵白二羯磨语后才能做。从此以后,在衣不离等白二业中,因为是轻业,也可以先告白再做。白四业则是现在受具足戒的业,现在这四种业应当在已结的界内做,如果没有已结的界,则在水洒界等处做,如果无法清理,则在未结的界内做。另有人说:“在造房舍、造精舍的时候,那些房舍精舍地点怎么能作为界内来做呢?所以应当在各自造房舍精舍的地方做。”这种说法只是他们的话而已,不应从实质上去相信。这里应以对地点的考察为准。就像考察僧团房舍时,以请求等方式对地点进行考察后,避免下面的地点告白过失和违犯相,然后由白二业认可的比丘们前往那里考察房舍精舍的地点,因此巴利文中说“由那些认可的比丘们前往那里考察房舍地点”。否则,如果让没有衣钵的人或者没有亲教师的人来受具足戒,即使诵了“具足衣钵”“某某的受具足戒请求者,以某某为亲教师”的羯磨语,业也可能不成立。另有人说:“在结界时所做的,就像结界时比丘们站在那里诵羯磨语,那个地方也是未结的界。如果是已结的界,就会有界重叠或者界混杂。”确实如此,但那个结界的地方被清出后,因为结界业属于那里,在别的村落里被认可的比丘们不能破坏站在村落界限内的比丘们的业。如果清出结界的地方后再结界,那么世尊在世时,六群比丘怎么能随意结界呢?不应这样看。就像毗舍佉鹿母用九千万金买下土地,建造了名为东园的大精舍;给孤独长者用金币铺满祇陀太子的园林,买下后建造了名为祇园的大精舍。这样想积福的人们建造精舍和住处,所以应当看到六群比丘是随意结界的。这是关于近行界的讨论。
Kasmāti ce , tasmiṃ vihāre purimikāya upagatā kathinatthārakusalā na honti. Atthārakusalā khandhakabhāṇakattherā pariyesitvā ānetabbā. Kammavācaṃ sāvetvā kathinaṃ attharāpetvā dānañca bhuñjitvā gamissanti, ānisaṃso pana itaresaṃ vahotī’ti. Aññasīmaṭṭhakabhikkhūnampi kammavāca sāvanassa aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttattā. Chinnavassāvā pacchimikāya upagatā vā aññasmiṃ vihāre vutthavassāpi vā purimikāya upagatānaṃ gaṇapūraṇamattameva labhanti, ānisaṃso itaresaṃyeva hoti. Sacepi te chinnavassādayo anumodenti, bhinno kathinatthāro, idaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vicāritaṃ. Apare pana ‘‘kathinatthatasīmanti upacārasīmaṃ sandhāya vutta’’nti vuttattā upacārasīmāyameva kathinanatthāraka ñattiṃ karonti, taṃ ayuttaṃ, sodhetuṃ dukkarattā. Tathā hi upacārasīmāyameva paviṭṭhagāmasīmāyaṃ tattha otiṇṇe bhikkhū tattha pāsānayanaṃ vā bahisīmakaraṇaṃ vā ko sakkhissati. ‘‘Kathinatthatasīmāya’’nti imināpipadena kathinatthatabhāvoyeva vutto, na kathinatthatasāṭakassa dānakammavācā, sā ca vicāraṇā kammacatukkena dīpetabbā. Tattha apalokanakammaṃ ñattikammaṃ ñattidutiyakammaṃ ñatticatutthakammanti. Tattha apalokanakammaṃ nāma sīmaṭṭhakasaṅghaṃ sodhetvā chandārahānaṃ chandaṃ āharitvā samaggassa saṅghassa anumatiyā saṅghaṃ kittetvā ‘‘ruccati saṅghassā’’ti tikkhuttuṃ anusāvetvā kattabbaṃ vuccati. Ñattikammaṃ nāma vuttanayeneva samaggassa saṅghassa anumatiyā ekāya ñattiyā kattabbaṃ kammaṃ. Ñattidutiyakammaṃ nāma vuttanayeneva samaggassa saṅghassa anumatiyā ekāya ñattiyā ekāya ca anusāvanāyāti evaṃ ñattidutiyāya anusāvanāya kattabbaṃ kammaṃ. Ñatticatutthakammaṃ nāma vuttanayeneva samaggassa saṅghassa anumatiyā ekāya ñattiyā tīhi ca anusāvanāhīti evaṃ ñatticatutthāhi tīhi anusāvanāhi kattabbaṃ kammaṃ. Tattha apalokanakammaṃ phalabhājanakālādīsu lahukakammeyeva labbhati. Kathinatthatasāṭakadānepi anatthateyeva kathine tato bahuānisaṃsacīvarasāṭakaṃ labhitvā teneva sāṭakena attharitabbā, puna kammavācāya dānakiccaṃ natthi apalokanakammena saṅghassa anumatiyā dātabbaṃ. Kathinatthatasāṭakadānakammavācā ekā ce vaṭṭati. Puna kamma vācāyakiccaṃ natthi. Ñattikammaṃ pana dhammasaṅgāhakakāle mahākassapattherādīhi attanāva attānaṃ sammannanakāle lahukakammeyeva labbhati. Ñattidutiyakammaṃ pana sīmāsammuti, sīmāsamūhanaṃ, kathinadānaṃ, kathinuddhāro, kuṭivatthudesanā, vihāravatthudesanāti imāni cha garukammāni apaloketvā kātuṃ na vaṭṭati. Ñattidutiyakammavācaṃ sāvetvāva kātabbaṃ. Ito paresu cīvaravippavāsasammutiādīsu ñattidutiyakammesu apaloketvāpi kātabbaṃ, lahukakammattā. Ñatticatutthakammaṃ pana idāni upasampadākammaṃ idāni cattāri kammāni baddhasīmāya vā, tasmiṃ asati udakukkhepasīmāya vā sodhetuṃ asakkonte sati abaddhasīmāya vā kātabbameva. Apare evaṃ vadanti ‘‘kuṭivatthukāravihāravatthukārakāle tāni kuṭivihāravatthūni kathaṃ sīmaṭṭhā kātuṃ sakkhissanti, tasmā tattha tattheva kuṭivihārakaraṇaṭṭhāneyeva kātabba’’nti, taṃ tesaṃ vacanamattameva, na sārato paccetabbaṃ. Vatthuparāmasanamevettha pamāṇaṃ, tathā hi saṅghakuṭivatthuṃ olokentaṃ yācatityādinā vatthuparāmasanaṃ katvā heṭṭhā vatthuñattidose ca vipatti lakkhaṇe ca vajjetvā ñattidutiyakammena sammatabhikkhūhi tattha kuṭivihāraṭṭhānaṃ gantvā oloketabbaṃ teneva pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘tehi sammatehi bhikkhūhi tattha gantvā kuṭivatthu oloketabba’’nti vuttaṃ. Aññathā pattacīvaravirahitaṃ puggalaṃ vā anupajjhāyakaṃ vā katvā upasampādentehi ‘‘paripuṇṇassa pattacīvara’’nti vā ‘‘itthannāmassa upasampadāpekkho, itthannāmena upajjhāyenā’’ti kammavācāya sāvitepi kammassa asijjhanaṃ bhaveyya. Apare evaṃ vadanti ‘‘sīmāsammutikāle pana kataṃ, tathā hi sīmāsammutikāle bhikkhū tasmiṃ yeva ṭhāne ṭhatvā kammavācaṃ sāventi, tasmimpi ṭhāne abaddhasīmāva hoti. Yadi baddhasīmā bhaveyya, sīmajjhottharaṇaṃ vā sīmasambhedo vā siyā’’ti. Saccaṃ, tathāpi taṃ sīmāsammutiṭṭhānaṃ bhujissaṃ katvā sīmasammutikammassakatattā visuṃgāme sammatānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ gāmasīme ṭhitā bhikkhū kammaṃ kopetuṃ na sakkonti. Yadi sīmasammutiṭṭhānaṃ bhujissaṃ katvāva sīmaṃ sammanneyya, kathaṃ bhagavato dharamānakāle chabbaggiyā bhikkhu yathāsukhaṃ sīmaṃ sammannissantīti na panevaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ tathā hi vāsākhā migāramātāpi navakoṭīhi bhūmiṃ gaṇhitvā pubbārāmaṃ nāma mahā vihāraṃ kāresi, tathā anāthapiṇḍiko kahāpaṇasanthatena jetassa rājakumārassa uyyānaṭṭhānaṃ kiṇāpetvā gaṇhitvā jetavanaṃ nāma mahāvihāraṃ kāresi evaṃ puññakāmā pariveṇaṃ katvā vihāraṃ karonti tasmā chabbaggiyā bhikkhū yathāsukhaṃ sīmaṃ bandhantīti daṭṭhabbanti. Ayaṃ upacārasīmāya vicāraṇā.
同住界,是指由见解与戒律共同一致的比丘僧团,通过布萨等僧团事务,认可他们作为同一整体而居住的界限。非离衣界,是指被认可可以离开三衣而住的界限。这两种界,因为最大可以达到三由旬,所以也称为大界。关于它们的详细讨论,在大义注中已经完整论述过了,因此这里不再说明。如果在这里再说,就会不加区分地重复已经说过的内容,所以不再说明。
Samānasaṃvāsasīmā nāma diṭṭhisīlasāmaññasaṅghātasaṅkhātehi bhikkhugaṇehi uposathādisaṅghakammena samānaṃ ekībhāvaṃ hutvā vasituṃ sammatā sīmā. Avippavāsasīmā nāma ticīvarena vippavasituṃ sammatā sīmā, etā dvesīmā tiyojanaparamatāyapi sambhavato mahāsīmā tipi nāmaṃ labhanti, tāsaṃ vicāraṇā mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ sabbaso paripuṇṇaṃ katvā vuttā, tasmā idha na vakkhāma vuccamānampi avisesetvā vuttaṃ bhaveyya, tasmā na vakkhāma.
所谓布施界限,就是国王和大臣们为了僧团四种资具的需要,把某个村庄或城镇,或者池塘、湖沼、林地等某一片地方划出来、确定下来,这就叫布施界限。这种布施界限,不是正等正觉者所允许的,也不是结集法藏的长老们设立的,而是布施的人自己设立的。在《论母义注》的《显隐义》中也说:国王和大臣等人建好精舍后,在周围划出一俱卢舍、半由旬或一由旬的范围,说“这是我们精舍的布施界限,凡是在这个范围内产生的收益,我们全部献给我们的精舍”,这样设立的就是布施界限。关于布施界限这一话题,有一位国王是大塔的施主,他去世后过了一年,在他的长子法王在位时,曾有过这样的善行。如果国王和大臣等人中有人把池塘、田地、地基等给了某座精舍,然后把连同这些一起的精舍交给某个人,那么这个人能不能以个人名义接受这座连同附属产业的精舍呢?还是只能以僧团的名义接受?另外,如果没有池塘、田地、地基等,只是一座纯粹的个人精舍,主人在世时没有送给别人,那么主人死后,这座精舍是归僧团呢,还是仍然属于个人?对此的回答是:如果国王和大臣等人把池塘、田地、地基等给了精舍,那么就不应该拒绝。这一点在律藏义注中说过:“当有人说‘我们把这座池塘、这块田地、这块地基献给精舍’时,不可以拒绝。”又说:“他们说‘我们把楼阁的婢女、男仆、田地、地基、牛、水牛献出去’,并不需要单独一一接受,楼阁被接受了,这些也就一并被接受了。”在《律决定论》中也是这样说的。
Lābhasīmā nāma yaṃ gāmaṃ vā nigamaṃ vā pokkharaṇītaḷākavanādikaṃ vā yaṃ yaṃ padesaṃ saṅghassa catuccappayatthāya rājarājamahāmattehi paricchinditvā ṭhapitā, esā lābhasīmā nāma. Neva sammāsambuddhena anuññātā, na dhammasaṅgahakattherehi ṭhapitā, api ca kho lābhadāyakehi ṭhapitāva. Mātikāṭṭhakathāya līnatthappakāsaniyampi lābhasīmāti yaṃ rājarājamahāmattādayo vihāraṃ kāretvā gāvutaṃ vā aḍḍhayojanaṃ vā yojanaṃ vā samantā paricchinditvā ‘‘ayaṃ amhākaṃ vihārassa lābhasīmā, yaṃ etthantare uppajjati, taṃ sabbaṃ amhākaṃ vihārassa demā’’ti ṭhapenti, ayaṃ lābhasīmā nāmā’ti vuttaṃ. Imasmiṃ lābhasīmādhikāre rañño mahācetiyadāyakassa divaṅgatakālato ekasmiṃ saṃvacchare atīte tassa jeṭṭhaputtassa dhammarañño kāle īdisaṃ puññaṃ bhūtapubbaṃ. Yadi hi rājarājamahāmattādīsu yo koci yassa vihārassa yāni taḷākakhettavatthādīni datvā taṃ sahitavihāraṃ puggalassa deti, evaṃ sati kiṃ tassa puggalassa taṃ sahitavihāraṃ puggalikabhāvena paṭiggahetuṃ vaṭṭati, udāhu saṅghikabhāvenevāti taḷākakhettavatthādivirahito pana kevalo puggalikavihāro aññesaṃ dammīti adatvā puggale mate saṅghiko hoti, udāhu puggalikoyevāti. Tatrāyaṃ vissajjanā, yadi hi rājarājamahāmattādīsu yokoci vihārassa taḷākakhettāvatthādīni deti, evaṃ sati paṭikkhipituṃ na vaṭṭatītidaṭṭhabbaṃ tena vuttaṃ vinayaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘imaṃ taḷākaṃ, imaṃ khettaṃ, imaṃ vatthuṃ vihārassa demāti vutte paṭikkhipituṃ na labbhatī’’ti. ‘‘Pāsādassa dāsiṃ, dāsaṃ, khettaṃ, vatthuṃ, gomahiṃsaṃ demāti vadanti, pāṭekkaṃ gahaṇakiccaṃ natthi, pāsāde paṭiggahite paṭiggahitameva hotī’’ti ca. Vinayavinicchayapakaraṇe ca.
或者把田地、宅基、池塘等,以及牛、羊之类的,布施出去;
就算有人说出“这是给寺院的”,也不能因此就禁止。
‘‘Khettavatthutaḷākaṃ vā, dema goajikādikaṃ; Vihārassāti vuttepi, nisedhetuṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti.
《小诵注》里也说:“如果有人说‘我把田地等布施给寺院’,这样说是可以的。”这里说“我们布施给寺院”,应当知道指的是僧团共有的寺院,不是个人私有的寺院。因为《除疑论》里也是这样说的:说“布施给寺院”,是就僧团共有的寺院而说的。虽然泛泛地说“楼阁”,但在“那时,毗舍佉鹿子母想为僧团建造一座象牙装饰的楼阁”这个事例中,因为已经允许受用楼阁,可以知道这里也是就僧团共有的楼阁而说的。正如《除疑论》所说:“一切楼阁的受用。”在巴利注疏的解说部分,“以金银等种种庄严”等话,是就僧团共有的住处而说的。至于个人所有的金银等种种庄严之物,比丘根本不可以接受,因为已经说过“不得以任何方式接受金银”,所以注疏在这里没有说“或僧团共有的寺院、或个人私有的寺院”。由于说的是“在比丘们的法和律的解说处”,应当知道只有僧团共有的金银等所制成的住处和住处资具才可以,个人私有的则不可以。因此,精通律的人应当知道:附带水池、田地、地基等的寺院,只属于僧团共有,不属于个人私有。如果国王、大臣等人把附带水池、田地、地基等的寺院布施给某个人,告诉这个人该寺院附带这些产业,在这种情况下,这个人应当以僧团共有寺院的方式接受,不应当以个人私有寺院的方式接受——应当这样理解。为什么呢?因为说了“布施给寺院”而布施的水池、田地、地基等,只属于僧团才合适。所以《除疑论》说:“说‘布施给寺院’,所布施的属于僧团才合适,不属于个人;应当像看待田地等那样来看待。”这里的搭配是这样的:说了“布施给寺院”而布施的田地等,属于僧团才合适,不属于个人;同样,说了“布施给寺院”而布施的金银等庄严的不净床座,属于僧团才合适,不属于个人——应当这样理解。只有以如法的称谓为僧团接受田地等,才可以。正如《除疑论》所说:“说‘请受用四种资具’而布施,是可以的。”这里是说:或者说“我布施水池,供比丘僧团受用四种资具”,或者说“比丘僧团受用四种资具,我布施这个水池”,或者说“从这个水池产生的收益,我布施四种资具”,这样说都可以。这都是就布施给僧团而说的;如果是布施给个人,即使这样说,水池、田地等也不可以。但如果是以清净心为了用水,水井、莲池等是可以的。“僧团有水池,请修建它”等话,处处都是以僧团为主体而说的。“田地等,一切只对僧团才合适,因为巴利文中没有允许以个人方式接受——应当这样理解。”至于个人以及为个人,以如法称谓接受田地、地基等,也不可以。因此,《除疑论》说:“田地、地基等,即使以如法称谓,个人也不得接受;根据所允许的内容可以知道:戒绝接受田地地基者”等,在所拒绝的诸项中,如果只有以个人方式接受不被允许,那么其他情形不得如此接受也就成立了。因此应当知道:附带水池、田地、地基等的寺院,应当以僧团共有寺院的方式接受,这一点已经成立。这是第一问的回答。
Khuddasikkhāpakaraṇe ca ‘‘khettādīni vihārassa, vutte dammīti vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Vihārassa demā’’ti cettha saṅghikavihārasseva, na puggalikavihārassāti daṭṭhabbaṃ, tathā hi vuttaṃ vimativinodaniyaṃ vihārassa demāti saṅghikavihāraṃ sandhāya vuttanti. ‘‘Pāsādassā’’ti ca sāmaññena vuttepi ‘‘tena kho pana samayena visākhā migāramātā saṅghassa atthāya sāḷindaṃ pāsādaṃ kārāpetukāmo hoti hatthinakhaka’’nti imasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ pāsādaparibhogassa anuññātattā saṅghikaṃyeva pāsādaṃ sandhāya vuttanti viññāyati tathā hi vuttaṃ vimativinodaniyaṃ sabbaṃ pāsādaparibhoga’nti. Pāḷiyā aṭṭhakathāya vaṇṇanādhikāre ‘‘suvaṇṇarajatādivicitrānī’’tiādi saṅghikasenāsanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Puggalikaṃ pana suvaṇṇādivicitraṃ bhikkhussa sampaṭicchitumeva na vaṭṭati, ‘‘na kenaci pariyāyena jātarūpajataṃ sādiyitabba’’nti vuttattā, tenevettha aṭṭhakathāyaṃ saṅghikavihāre vā puggalikavihāre vāti na vutta’nti. ‘‘Bhikkhūnaṃ dhammavinayavaṇṇanaṭṭhāne’’ti vuttattā saṅghikameva suvaṇṇādimayaṃ senāsanaṃ senāsanaparikkhārā ca vaṭṭanti, na puggalikānīti gahetabbanti ca, tasmā taḷākakhettavatthādisahitavihāro saṅghikoyeva hoti, na puggalikoti vinayakovidehi daṭṭhabbo. Sace pana rājarājamahāmattādīsu yokoci taḷākakhettavatthādisahitaṃ vihāraṃ puggalassa taṃ sahitavihārabhāvamārocetvā deti, evaṃ sati puggalassa saṅghikavihārabhāveneva paṭiggahetuṃ vaṭṭati, na puggalikavihārabhāvenāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Kasmā, vihārassa demā’’ti vatvā dinnānaṃ taḷākakhettavatthādīnaṃ saṅghasseva vaṭṭamānattā. Tenevāha vimativinodaniyaṃ ‘‘vihārassa demāti vuttaṃ saṅghassa vaṭṭati, na puggalassa, khettādi viya daṭṭhabba’’nti. Tatrāyaṃ yojanā vihārassādemāti vatvā dinnaṃ khettādi saṅghassa vaṭṭati, na puggalassa, evaṃ vihārassa demāti vuttaṃ suvaṇṇādivicittaṃ akappiyamañcaṃ saṅghassa vaṭṭati, na puggalassāti daṭṭhabbanti. Saṅghasseva kappiyavohārena khettādīni paṭiggahetuṃ vaṭṭati, tathā hi vuttaṃ vimativinodaniyaṃ ‘‘cattāropaccaye paribhuñjatūti deti vaṭṭatītiettha bhikkhusaṅghassa catupaccayaparibhogatthāya taḷākaṃ dammīti vā bhikkhusaṅgho cattāro paccaye paribhuñjituṃ taḷākaṃ dammīti vā ito taḷākato uppanne cattāro paccaye dammīti vā vuttampi vaṭṭati. Idañca saṅghassa diyyamānaññeva sandhāya vuttaṃ, puggalassa pana evampi dinnaṃ taḷākakhettādi na vaṭṭati. Suddhacittassa pana udakaparibhogatthaṃ kūpapokkharaṇīādayo vaṭṭanti. Saṅghassataḷākaṃatthi, taṃkathantiādināhisabbattha saṅghassavaseneva vuttanti. ‘‘Khettādayo pana sabbesaṅghasseva vaṭṭanti, pāḷiyaṃ puggalikavasena gahetuṃ ananuññātattāti daṭṭhabba’’nti ca. Puggalassa pana puggalānañca khettavatthādīni kappiyavohārenāpi paṭiggahetuṃ na vaṭṭati. Evañcakatvā vimativinodaniyaṃ ‘‘khettavatthādīnipi kappiyavohārenāpi puggalānaṃ gahetuṃ na vaṭṭati, tathā anuññātattāti viññāyati khettavatthupaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hotī’’ti ādinā hi paṭikkhittāsu ekasseva puggalikavasena gahaṇe ananuññāte taditarānaṃ tathāgahetabbatā siddhāva hotī’ti vuttaṃ, tasmā taḷākakhettavatthādisahitassa vihārassa saṅghikabhāveneva paṭiggahetabbatā siddhā hotīti daṭṭhabbā. Ayaṃ paṭhamapañhe vissajjanā.
没有水池、田地、地基等附属物的精舍,也可以作为个人所有物来接受。这种精舍在那个人活着的时候,属于他个人所有。如果他没把它送给别人就去世了,那就不能分发、不能分割,应当看作归僧团所有。就像经里说的:比丘们,比丘去世后,僧团是他钵和衣的主人。另外,照顾病人的人有大功劳,比丘们,我允许僧团把三衣送给照顾病人的人。其中那些轻便的物品、轻便的资具,应当由在场的僧团来分配。其中那些重的物品、重的资具,则归四方僧团——无论已来的还是未来的——不可分发、不可分割。律注中也说:那个人活着的时候归个人所有,死了以后就归僧团所有;即使没有送给别人而留下来的资具,也属于僧团。两个人共有的东西没有分割,其中一人去世,另一人就是主人。多个人共有的情况也是这样,所有人都去世了,就归僧团所有。
Taḷākakhettavatthādivirahitaṃ pana vihāraṃ puggalikabhāvenāpi paṭiggahetuṃ vaṭṭati. So ca vihāro tasmiṃ puggale jīvante puggaliko hoti. Aññesaṃ dammīti adatvā mate avissajjanīyo avebhaṅgiyo, saṅghikoyeva hotīti daṭṭhabbo. Yathāha, bhikkhussa bhikkhave kālaṅkate saṅgho sāmi pattacīvare. Api ca gilānupaṭṭhākā bahūpakārā, anujānāmi bhikkhave saṅghena ticīvarañca gilānupaṭṭhākānaṃ dātuṃ. Yaṃ tattha lahubhaṇḍaṃ lahuparikkhāraṃ, taṃ sammukhībhūtena saṅghena bhājetabbaṃ. Yaṃ tattha garubhaṇḍaṃgaruparikkhāraṃ taṃ āgatānāgatassa cātuddisassa saṅghassa avissajjiyaṃ avebhaṅgiyanti. Vinayaṭṭhakathāyañca ‘‘tasmiṃ jīvante puggaliko, mate saṅghikoyevāti aññesaṃ adatvā ṭhapitaparikkhārāpi tattha saṅghasseva honti. Dvinnaṃ santakaṃ hoti avibhattaṃ, ekasmiṃ kālaṅkate itaro sāmi. Bahūnaṃ santakepi eseva nayo, sabbesu matesu saṅghikaṃ hotī’’ti vuttaṃ.
在这里,关于“重物”等说法中,所谓重物,按类别有五种,按具体物品则有二十五种。因此,即使是属于亡者的寺院,也应当知道它属于重物。所以注疏中说:“其中什么是轻物,其中什么是重物。”
Ettha ca yaṃ tattha garubhaṇḍa’nti ādīsu garubhaṇḍaṃ nāma rāsivasena pañcavidhaṃ, sarūpavasena pana pañcavīsatividhaṃ hoti, tasmā matakasantakabhūtassāpi vihārassa garubhaṇḍabhāvo veditabbo, tenāha aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘yaṃ tattha lahubhaṇḍaṃ yaṃ tattha garubhaṇḍa’’nti.
如此,以五聚、具五清净眼者……
导师宣说了二十五种重物。
Iti pañcahi rāsīhi, pañcanimmalalocano; Pañcavīsavidhaṃ nātho, garubhaṇḍaṃ pakāsayīti.
在这里,应当知道精舍的重物性。这是对第二个问题的回答。
Ettha vihārassa garubhaṇḍabhāvo veditabbo. Ayaṃ dutiyapañhe vissajjanā.
这是汉萨瓦提(天鹅城)上首大长老们的回答。不过,罗摩尼国的长老们说:即使以个人身份也应当接受;同样,阎浮罗国的长老们、苏那巴兰多地方的长老们、以及仙人城的长老们也都说,以个人身份接受并没有过失。这些长老的意思是:这种所谓“利养界”,既不是正自觉者所允许的,也不是结集法藏的长老们所设立的,而是求福的施主们设立的。所以,求福的国王、大臣等人建好精舍后,为了给这精舍带来利养,就划定一块区域,规定“凡在这范围之内产生的,我们全都送给我们的精舍”。而那座精舍,他们又按自己的意愿送给任何自己喜欢的人:“我把这座精舍送给你,让它成为你的精舍。”那个人接受的,也正是世尊所允许的那种精舍,比如“比丘们,我允许五种崖窟精舍”等所说的。因为他接受的只是世尊所允许的精舍本身。如果说那座精舍里有田地等东西,那么,依“远离接受田地等”等所禁止的田地等物的接受,由于他并没有接受那些田地等物,而只是接受了精舍本身,所以与精舍相连的田地等物上产生的衣、乞食、病者医药资具等,也都以那个人的如法方式而运作。个人无论接受还是受用都没有过失,因为他受用的是世尊所允许的如法资具。如果要引经据典,那就是“比丘们,我允许受用一切殿堂”。难道毗舍佉·鹿子母不是为僧团而布施了鹿子母讲堂等住所吗?确实如此,但那个人是僧团所摄的成员,当僧团被允许受用殿堂时,其中所含的个人也就一并被允许了。否则,个人坐在精舍里,僧团在同一精舍界内作羯磨时,也不会成为羯磨破坏、僧众不完整之过了。而且《显扬心要疏》中会说:依“比丘们,我允许受用一切殿堂”这句话,即使在个人所属的坐卧处,凡限定为坐卧处所用的金瓶等物,虽可以坐卧具的方式受用,但纯粹据为己有而受用则不可以。由这句话也可了知:个人所属的精舍也具足一切如法性,因为可以看到“比丘们,我允许受用一切殿堂”这一能证之语。“金瓶等”中的“等”字表限度义,或表种类义,由此摄取银、珍珠、水晶等不如法的瓶,以及金、银、珍珠、水晶等制的器皿、钵盂等坐卧处资具——这些作为比丘的资具是不允许受用的;奴婢、牛、水牛也同样不允许;田地等物,比丘据为己有而接受也同样不允许;然而对精舍本身则没有什么该禁止的,因为可以看到“一切”一词。因此《善见律义注》说:“至于坐卧处的门扇、窗扇等,一切即使是宝石所制的、光彩夺目的工艺装饰都可以。坐卧处没有什么该禁止的,除非是与梵行相违的坐卧处。”由此可知,除了“村与村的近处”这类相违处以外,一切如法与不如法的物件对精舍都是许可的,连一点点也没有该禁止的。因此论主在《律抉择》中如此说。
Ayaṃ haṃsāvatiyā pāmokkhamahātherānaṃ vissajjanā. Rāmaññaraṭṭhavāsino pana mahātherā puggalikabhāvenāpi paṭiggahetabbamevāti vadanti, tathā jaṃmāyaraṭṭhavāsinopi mahātherā, tathā sūnāparantaraṭṭhavāsinopi mahātherā tathā isinagaravāsinopi mahātherā puggalikabhāvena paṭiggahaṇe doso natthī’ti vadanti tesaṃ mahātherānaṃ ayamadhippāyo lābhasīmānāmesā neva sammāsambuddhena anuññātā. Na dhammasaṅgāhakattherehipi ṭhapitā. Api ca kho puññatthikehi lābhadāyakehi ṭhapitā tasmā puññatthikā rājarājamahāmattādayo vihāraṃ kārāpetvā tassa vihārassa lābhatthāya padesaṃ paricchinditvā ṭhapenti ‘‘yaṃ etthantare uppajjati, taṃ sabbaṃ amhākaṃ vihārassa demā’’ti. Taṃ pana vihāraṃ attano rucitassa yassakassaci puggalassa ‘‘imaṃ vihāraṃ tuyhaṃ dammi, tava vihāro hotū’’tivā attano ruciyā deti sopi puggalo ‘‘anujānāmi bhikkhave pañcaleṇāni vihāra’’nti ādinā anuññātavihārameva paṭiggaṇhāti, bhagavato anuññātavihāramattasseva paṭiggahitattāti. Tasmiṃ vihāre khettavatthādīni atthīti ce. ‘‘Khettavatthupaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hotī’’ti ādinā yaṃ khettādivatthupaṭiggahaṇaṃ paṭikkhittaṃ, tassa khettādivatthussa appaṭiggahitattā vihāramattameva hi paṭiggahite tappaṭibaddhā khettādivatthusmiṃ uppannacīvara piṇḍapātagilānapaccayabhesajjaparikkhārāpi tasseva puggalassa kappiyabhāveneva pavattanti, puggalassa paṭiggahaṇe vā paribhutte vā doso natthi, bhagavatā eva anuññātassa kappiyapaccayassa paribhuñjitattā. Suttaṃ āharāti ce, ‘‘anujānāmi bhikkhave sabbaṃ pāsādaparibhoga’’nti. Nanu ca visākhā migāramātā saṅghasseva atthāya sāḷindaṃ pāsādaṃ hatthinakhakanti. Saccaṃ, tathāpi puggalo saṅghapariyāpanno saṅghassa pāsādaparibhoge anuññāte tadantogadhassapi puggalassa anuññātameva hoti. Aññathā puggale antovihāre nisinnoyeva saṅgho tasmiṃ yeva vihārasīme kammaṃ karontopi kammakopo na bhaveyya, avaggārahattāti vakkhati ca sāratthadīpaniyaṃ ‘‘anujānāmi bhikkhave sabbaṃ pāsādaparibhoga’’nti vacanato puggalikepi senāsane se nāsanaparibhogavasena niyamitaṃ suvaṇṇaghaṭādikaṃ paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭamānampi kevalaṃ attano santakaṃ katvā paribhuñjituṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti, imināpi vacanena puggalikavihārassapi sabbakappiyabhāvo viññāyati ‘‘anujānāmi bhikkhave sabbaṃ pāsādaparibhoga’’nti ñāpakassa dassanato. Suvaṇṇaghaṭādikanti ettha ādisaddo mariyādattho, pakārattho vā, tena rajatahārakūṭa-jātiphalikādīni akappiyaghaṭāni suvaṇṇarajatahārakūṭa jātiphalikādibhājanasaravādīni ca senāsanaparikkhārāni saṅgaṇhāti, tāni bhikkhussa parikkhārabhāvena na vaṭṭanti tathā dāsidāsagomahiṃsāpi, tathā khettādivatthumpi bhikkhussa attano santakabhāvena paṭiggahetuṃ na vaṭṭanti, vihārassa pana paṭisedhetabbaṃ natthi, sabbasaddassa dassanato tenevāha samantapāsādikāya vinayaṭṭhakathāya ‘‘senāsane pana dvārakavāṭa vātapānakavāṭādīsu sabbaṃ ratanamayampi vaṇṇamaṭṭhakammaṃ vaṭṭati. Senāsane kiñci paṭisedhetabbaṃ natthi aññatra viruddhasenāsanā’’ti, iminā ṭhapetvā’gāmañca gāmūpacārañcā’ti ettha viruddhasenāsanaṃ ṭhapetvā sabbakappiyākappiyaṃ vihārassa kappati, kiñciappamattakampi paṭisedhetabbaṃ nāma natthīti viññāyati, tenevāha vinayavinicchaye.
我们把田地、园地、池塘,以及母牛、山羊之类的东西,都布施出去。
就算有人已经说了“这是给寺院的”,也不该因此就阻止。
‘‘Khettavatthu taḷākaṃvā, dema goajikādikaṃ; Vihārassāti vuttepi, nisedhetuṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti.
“我们把精舍施予〔僧团〕”这句话,难道不是针对僧团共有的精舍而说的吗?《除疑》里就是这样说的。这里应当依据阿阇黎的意旨来理解:如果说“我们把田地等施予个人所属的精舍”,那就应当以“近事男,这不如法”来遮止。为什么呢?因为个人是那座精舍的主人,把精舍施出去就等于施给了个人;这样一来,就会招来按“远离受取田地等”这条学处治罪的过失。但对僧团共有的精舍,就不应当遮止。为什么呢?因为那个人并不是僧团精舍的主人。凡是指定施给四方僧团的任何地方,无论大小,即使有人强占取用,也不构成波罗夷,因为整个四方僧团不可能全体都放弃权益。所以,如果遮止对僧团精舍的布施,就成了障碍僧团获得利养的人。正是针对这个意思,才说“我们把精舍施予”是就僧团精舍而说的,并不是说以个人所有的性质也可以受取。这样一来,与“由于物主放弃权益”这句话——那里说,对某人私有的池塘和田地,只有该人放弃权益时才构成波罗夷;但如果那池塘是大家共有的,田地是各人私有的,那么侵占者在各田主放弃权益时构成偷盗;如果田地也是大家共有的,那就只有全体共有者都放弃权益时才构成波罗夷,否则不构成——应当这样理解。这样就和《除疑》里说的话不相违背了。因为,既然连同田地等的精舍以个人所有的性质就是不如法的,那么个人又怎么能就田地等对他人提起诉讼呢?也许有人会说:“‘放弃权益’里说的‘某人私有的池塘和田地’,是专指在家人私有之物而说的。”但即便如此也不该这样说。为什么呢?因为可以看到“放弃权益”是指:当物主刚强粗暴,甚至会危及我的性命和梵行,心想“我不需要这个了”而舍弃。正因如此,《除疑》才说“田地是各人私有的,在其放弃权益时〔构成盗〕”。同样,依据“比丘们,我许可受用一切殿堂”这句话,《显扬心要》说“即使在个人所属的坐卧处,凡限定为坐卧处所用的金瓶等,虽可受用,但纯粹据为己有而受用则不可”——本论与这句话也不相违。同样,与义注所说“坐卧处没有什么该禁止的,除非是相违的坐卧处”也完全吻合。同样,与“比丘们,凡我未曾遮止说‘这不如法’的,若它随顺如法、排除不如法,那么它对你们就是如法的”这条随顺经也完全吻合。为什么呢?因为依据“比丘们,我许可受用五种崖窟精舍”等所许可的精舍本身即被受取,而且只受用系属于它的衣等如法资具,所以精舍、乞食、病者医药资具等对比丘也都是如法的、随顺如法的。如此,由于本论与经、随顺经、阿阇黎传规以及自己的见解都相吻合,毕竟就像恒河水与耶牟那河水交融在一起那样毫无违逆,连同田地等的精舍以个人所有的性质也应受取——律通达者应据此辨明其如法与否。这就是仙人城居住的诸大长老所作的相同解答。
Nanuca vihārassa demāti saṅghikavihāraṃ sandhāya vuttanti vimativinodaniyaṃ vuttanti. Vuttaṃ ettha hi ācariyassaadhippāyena bhavitabbaṃ ‘‘khettavattādīnipuggalikavihārassa demā’’ti vutte ‘‘na kappati upāsakā’’ti paṭikkhipitabbaṃ. Kasmā puggalo tassa vihārassa sāmi, vihārassa dinne puggalassa dinnameva hoti, evaṃ sati ca ‘‘khettavatthupaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hotī’’ti ādinā vuttasikkhāpadena kāretabbataṃ āpajjati. Saṅghikavihārassa pana na paṭikkhipitabbaṃ. Kasmā so puggalo tassa saṅghikavihārassa anissaro. Cātuddisaṃ saṅghaṃ uddissa dinnaṃ yaṃkiñci khuddakaṃ vā mahantaṃ vā padesaṃ acchinditvā gaṇhantassapi pārājiko na hoti, sabbasseva cātuddisikassa saṅghassa dhuranikkhepassa asambhavato tasmā saṅghikavihārassa dinne paṭikkhitte saṅghassa lābhantarāyakaro hotīti. Imamevatthaṃ sandhāya vihārassa demāti saṅghikavihāraṃ sandhāya vutta’nti vuttaṃ bhaveyya, na puggalikabhāvenāpi paṭiggahetabbanti. Evañca sati sāmikānaṃ dhuranikkhepenā’ti ettha ekassa santake taḷāke khette ca jāte tasseva dhuranikkhepena pārājikaṃ. Yadi pana taṃ taḷākaṃ sabbasādhāraṇaṃ, khettāni pāṭipuggalikāni, tassa ca dhuranikkhepe avahāro. Atha khettānipi sabbasādhāraṇāni, sabbesaṃ dhuranikkhepeyeva pārājikaṃ, nāsatīti daṭṭhabbanti vimativinodaniyaṃ vuttavacanena avirodho siyā, tathā hi khettavatthādisahitassa vihārassa puggalikabhāvena akappiye sati. Kathaṃ puggalassa khettavatthādikamārabbha abhiyuñjabhāvo bhaveyya, evañca pana vadeyya ‘‘dhuraṃ nikkhipatīti ettha ekassa santake taḷāke khette cātiettha gihisantakameva sandhāya vutta’’nti. Tathāpi na vattabbaṃ. Kasmā ‘‘dhuraṃ nikkhipatīti yadā pana sāmiko ayaṃ thaddho kakkhaḷo, jīvitabrahmacariyantarāyampi me kareyya, alaṃ dāni mayhaṃ iminā’’ti padassa dissanato teneva ‘‘khettāni pāṭipuggalikāni, tassa ca dhuranikkhepe’’ti vimativinodaniyaṃ vuttaṃ. Tathā ‘‘anujānāmi bhikkhave sabbaṃ pāsādaparibhoga’’nti vacanato puggalikepi senāsane senāsanaparibhogavasena niyamitaṃ suvaṇṇaghaṭādikaṃ paribhuñjituṃ na vaṭṭamānampi kevalaṃ attano santakaṃ katvā paribhuñjituṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti sāratthadīpaniyaṃ vutta vacanenāpi avirodho siyā, tathā ‘‘senāsane kiñci paṭisedhetabbaṃ natthi aññatra viruddhasenāsananā’’ti aṭṭhakathāvacanenāpi saṃsandameva. Tathā ‘‘yaṃ bhikkhave mayā idaṃ na kappatīti appaṭikkhittaṃ, taṃ ce kappiyaṃ anulometi, akappiyaṃ paṭibāhati, taṃ vo kappatī’’ti iminā suttānulomenapisaṃndameva. Kathaṃ ‘‘anujānāmi bhikkhave pañcaleṇāni vihārantyā’’dinā anuññātavihārassa paṭiggahitatthā. Tappaṭibaddhacīvarādikappiyapaccayasseva paribhuñjitattā ca vihārapiṇḍapātagilānapaccayabhesajjaparikkhārāpi bhikkhussa sabbakappiyā kappiyānulomā ca honti. Evaṃ suttasuttānulomaācariyavādaattanomatīhi saṃsandanato aññadatthu gaṅgodakena yamunodakaṃ viya khettavatthādisahitavihāro puggalikabhāvenāpi paṭiggahetabboti kappiyā kappiyāni vinayakovidehi daṭṭhabbo. Ayaṃ isinagaravāsīnaṃ mahātherānaṃ samānavissajjanā.
有些人一起谋划,偷走了贵重物品,又生起了放弃责任的心,他们并没有犯波罗夷。这是智者曾经思考过的一个问题。
‘‘Ye ca janā garubhaṇḍaṃ saṃvidhāya avaharuṃ. Dhuranikkhepo ca hoti, pārājikamanāpannā, pañhāmesā kusalehi cintitā’’ti.
这个问题是针对那些对僧团共有地起了盗心的比丘说的。因为在现前僧团放弃责任的时候,四方僧团并没有放弃责任,所以不存在偷盗的问题。这是对利养界限的考察分析。
Ayaṃ pañhā saṅghikabhūmithenake bhikkhu sandhāya vuttā, tattha hi paccuppannasaṅghassa dhuranikkhepena cātuddisikasaṅghassa dhuranikkhepābhāvato avahāro natthīti. Ayaṃ lābhasimāya vicāraṇā.
村界、镇界和城界则是很明确的。不过,它们之间的区别要这样理解:在某个地方,如果只有市场,没有围墙围绕,或者只有围墙围绕却没有市场,这个地方就叫“村”。如果某个地方只有村落,却没有市场和围墙,这个地方就叫“镇”。如果某个地方既有市场,又有围墙围绕,这个地方就叫“城”。这个地方叫“城”,从“这里有城”这一说法的含义来说,是因为它是适合国王或大臣居住的地方,所以称为“城”。而在世间论典中……
Gāmasīmānigamasīmānagarasīmā pana pākaṭāyeva. Tāsaṃ pana viseso evaṃ veditabbo yasmiṃ pana padese āpaṇameva atthi, na pākāraparikkhittaṃ pākāraparikkhittameva vā atthi na āpaṇaṃ ayaṃ padeso gāmo nāma. Yasmiṃ pana ṭṭhāne gāmoyeva atthi, na pana āpaṇapākārā santi, ayaṃ padeso nigamo nāma. Yattha pana āpaṇampi atthi pākāraparikkhittampi, ayaṃ padeso nagaraṃ nāma. Ayaṃ padeso nāgāravanti etthāti vacanatthena rājūnaṃ vā mahāmattānaṃ vā nivāsanayogyaṭṭhānattā nagaranti vuccati. Lokiyasatthe pana.
种种天界住处、宫殿、市集与殿堂;
智者让人看见那座城,王路也被点缀得庄严。
‘‘Vicittadevāyatanaṃ, pāsādāpaṇamandiraṃ; Nagaraṃ dassaye vidvā, rājamaggo pasobhita’’nti.
已经说过。这样了解了村、镇、城之间的差别之后,应当知道:村本身就是村界,镇本身就是镇界,城本身就是城界——这就是这些词的含义。其中,比丘们,在还没有正式划定、还没有设立结界的地方,无论他依止哪个村或镇而住,那个村的村界或那个镇的镇界,就是那里被允许的同一住处、同一布萨的范围,在那个地方,整个村的范围都算在内。如果在同一个村的田地里,国王划出某一块地方,说“这算一个单独的村”,然后把它赐给某人,那块地方也确实是单独的村界。因此,这个村界和其他的村、城、镇的常规界限,都和正式结成的界一样。只不过,它们不能享有三衣不离身的豁免。关于这一点,另有一些人说:“像波斯匿王、拘萨罗王这些人,向波伽罗娑提等人,按照达嚫水倾注的方式施舍,就像以梵授的方式赐予一样,只有以梵授方式赐予的才成为单独的村界,不是仅仅收租的地块,因为对可砍可分的土地没有所有权。”这种说法不应这样看待。因为可砍可分的土地是属于国王的,所以按照世间的惯例约定,这块地方是这个村的界限,只有国王们划定的才算数。如果是有砍伐破坏权者,那就只算作国王。而那块村地也应该是城和国的界限,而不只是村界而已。因此,在《善见律毗婆沙》中说:“在哪个范围内,那个村的村主们获得赋税,那个范围无论小还是大,都只算作村界。城界、镇界也是同样的道理。”以上就是对村、镇、城界限的考察。
Vuttaṃ. Evaṃ gāmanigamanagarānaṃ visesaṃ ñatvā gāmoyeva gāmasīmā, nigamoyeva nigamasīmā, nagarameva nagarasīmāti tāsaṃ vacanattho veditabbo. Tattha yaṃ padesaṃ asammatāya bhikkhave sīmāya aṭhapitāya yaṃ gāmaṃ vā nigamaṃ vā upanissāya viharati, yā tassa gāmassa vā gāmasīmā nigamassa vā nigamasīmā, ayaṃ tattha samānasaṃvāsā ekūposathā’ti anuññātaṃ, tasmiṃ padese sabbopi vā gāmapadeso. Yampi ekasmiṃyeva gāmakhette ekaṃ padesaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ visuṃ gāmo hotū’’ti paricchinditvā rājā kassaci deti sopi visuṃgāmasīmā hotiyeva tasmā sā ca itarā ca pakatigāmanagaranigamasīmā baddhasīmāsadisāyeva honti. Kevalaṃ pana ticīvaravippavāsaparihāraṃ na labhanti. Ettha ca apare evaṃ vadanti, ‘‘rājā pasenadīkosalādayo pokkharasātipabhutīnaṃ dakkhiṇodakapātanavasena denti viya brahmadeyyavasena dinnameva visuṃ gāmasīmā hoti, na āyamattassa, chejjabhejjassa anissarattā’’ti taṃ na panevaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, chejjabhejjassa rājārahattā tathā hi lokavohārasaṅketavasena ayaṃ padeso imassa gāmassa paricchedo’’ti issarehi kataparicchinnameva pamāṇaṃ hoti. Yadi chejjabhejjakaro bhaveyya, rājātveva saṅkhyaṃ gacchati. Sopi gāmadeso nagararajjasīmā bhaveyya, na pana gāmasīmāmattameva, tenevāha samantapāsādikāya vinayaṭṭhakathāya ‘‘yattake padese tassa gāmassa gāmabhojakā baliṃ labhanti, so padeso appo vā hotu mahanto vā, gāmasīmātveva saṅkhyaṃ gacchati. Nagaranigamasīmāsupi eseva nayo’’ti. Ayaṃ gāma nigamanagarasīmānaṃ vicāraṇā.
所谓内部界,就是比丘们住在没有村庄的森林里时,以自己所在之处为中心,四周各七“阿般他罗”的范围,这一片地方被允许作为同一住处、同一布萨,就叫内部界。其中“四周各七阿般他罗”的意思是:比丘住在像温迪亚山林那样的森林里,从他站的地方算起,向东七阿般他罗、向西七阿般他罗、向南七阿般他罗、向北七阿般他罗,这样四周各七阿般他罗。按纵横交叉来算就是十四:东西方向是十四阿般他罗,南北方向也是十四阿般他罗,这样纵横各有十四,四周合起来就是二十八阿般他罗。这里一个阿般他罗等于二十八肘,所以东边七阿般他罗就是一百九十六肘,南、北、西边也一样,全部加起来就是七百八十四肘。如果按完整的圆形来算,全部就是一千一百七十六肘。按当地常用的计量方式来算则是——
Abbhantarasīmā nāma yaṃ paṭapadesaṃ agāmake bhikkhave araññe samantā sattabbhantarā, ayaṃ tattha samānasaṃvāsā ekūposathā’ti anuññātā abbhantarasīmā nāma. Tattha samantā sattabbhantarāti yasmiṃ viñjhāṭavisadise araññe bhikkhu vasati, athassa ṭhitokāsato samantā puratthimāya sattabbhantarā pacchimāya sattabbhantarā dakkhiṇāya sattabbhantarā uttarāya sattabbhantarāti samantā sattabbhantarā. Vinibbedhena cuddasā ti puratthimapacchimavasena cuddasabbhantarā, dakkhiṇuttaravasenapi cuddasabbhantarāti evaṃ nibbedhena cuddasa cuddasa katvā samantā aṭṭhavīsati abbhantarā honti. Ettha ca ekaṃ abbhantaraṃ aṭṭhavīsati hatthappamāṇaṃ hoti, tasmā puratthimāya sattabbhantare channavutisatahatthappamāṇaṃ hoti, evaṃ dakkhiṇuttarapacchimesupīti sabbaṃ sampiṇḍetvā caturāsītisattasatahatthappamāṇaṃ hoti. Parimaṇḍalavasena pana sabbaṃ chasattatiekasatuttarāni ca ekaṃ sahassañca hoti. Pakatiayanavasena minite pana –
五肘长的算是一杖,二十杖是一乌沙跋。
一由旬等于四拘卢舍,而一拘卢舍等于八十乌沙跋的距离。
‘‘Pañcahattho mato daṇḍo, vīsadaṇḍo usabho; Athītiusabhā gāvī, catugāvī yojana’’nti.
因为这样说,所以按阿亚那来细分时,在十四个内部区间里,就是七十八又二只手。把全部二十八个内部区间合起来,就是一百五十六又四只手。若按圆周来算,则是二百三十四又六只手。若按牛的单位来细分,则在十四个内部区间里,是四头牛少二,再加二罗陀那。全部合起来,在二十八个内部区间里,是七头牛,外加四罗陀那和十六阿亚那。若按圆周来算,则是十一头牛,外加六罗陀那和十四阿亚那。这就是这里从要义上作出的判定。不过有些人把“内部”这个词设想成表示手和罗陀那,这样说:因为说过“站在中间的周围,以七为细分,就是十四”,所以东方有七只手,南、北、西也各有七只手,这样细分就是十四只手。全部合起来,就是二十八只手的内部。这只是他们自己的想法,不应从要义上接受。为什么呢?因为在义注里,那里说“一个内部是二十八只手”。如果按他们的想法,全部合起来会成为二十八只手的内部,那么在义注里就该说“这里所谓内部,是二十八只手的量,站在中间的周围,以七为细分,就是十四”,然而并没有这样说。所以应当知道,那只是他们自己的想法而已。这里的意思是:在“那里那里”这一表述中,这是依处格表示限定。“一”是数量的界定。“内部”是划定范围的说明,或者说是确定性的说明。“二十八只手的量”是应被划定之法聚的说明。在那里,于那些周围各七的内部区间中,所谓一个内部,应当理解为二十八只手的量。这里还应当说明数法。它有两种:按计量和按称量。其中,计量数应这样理解:四把为一库杜婆,四库杜婆为一巴特婆,四巴特婆为一阿罗哈卡,四阿罗哈卡为一多那,四多那为一玛尼卡,四玛尼卡为一卡利,二十卡利为一车。这在《经集义注》等中说是同一辆车。但在《萨罗达义显》里说“九千车”。这里说:四把为一库杜婆,四库杜婆为一巴特婆,四巴特婆为一阿罗哈卡,四阿罗哈卡为一多那,四多那为一玛尼卡,四玛尼卡为一卡利,二十卡利为一车,这在《经集义注》等中说是同一辆车。说了这些之后,又写道:“但这里说两辆车是一车。”若按边地习惯来计量,则六千为一车;若按阿育王厨房里称量苏瓦卡哈塔米来计量,则按边地习惯是三百二十为一车。称量数则应这样理解。正如所说:
Vuttattā ayanavasena vinibbedhe cuddasabbhantare dvehatthādhikaaṭṭhasattati hoti. Sabbaṃ aṭṭhavīsati abbhantaraṃ sampiṇḍetvā catuhatthādhikachappaññāsuttara ekasataṃ hoti. Parimaṇḍalavasena pana chahatthādhikacatutiṃsuttaradvesatāni honti, usabhavasena pana vinibbedhena cuddasa abbhantare dvehi ūnāni cattāri usabhāni ca dveratanañca honti. Sabbaṃ sampiṇḍetvā aṭṭhavīsatiyā abbhantare caturatanañca soḷasa ayanāni adhikāni satta usabhāni honti. Parimaṇḍalavasena pana charatanañca cuddasaayanāni ca adhikāni ekādasa usabhāni honti. Ayamettha sārato vinicchayo. Keci pana abbhantarasaddaṃ hattharatanavācakaṃ parikappetvā evaṃ vadanti majjhe ṭhitassa samantā satta vinibbedhena cuddasā’ti vuttattā puratthimāya satta hatthā dakkhiṇuttarapacchimesupi satta satta hatthāti katvā evaṃ nibbedhena cuddasa hatthā honti. Sabbaṃ sampiṇḍetvā aṭṭhavīsatihatthaṃ abbhantaranti taṃ tesaṃ matimattameva, na sārato paccetabbaṃ. Kasmā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ tattha ekaṃ abbhantaraṃ aṭṭhavīsatihattha’nti vuttattā. Yadi tesaṃ matena sabbaṃ sampiṇḍetvā aṭṭhavīsatihatthabbhantaraṃ bhaveyya, aṭṭhakathāyaṃ tattha abbhantaraṃ nāma aṭṭhavīsatihatthappamāṇaṃ hoti, majjhe ṭhitassa samantā sattavinibbedhena cuddasā hontī’ti vattabbaṃ bhaveyya, na panevaṃ vuttaṃ, tasmā taṃ tesaṃ matimattamevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tattha ayañhetthattho tattha tatthā’ti niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ. Ekanti gaṇanaparicchedo. Abbhantaranti paricchinnaniddeso, niyamitaparidīpanaṃ vā. Aṭṭhavīsatihatthappamāṇanti paricchinditabbadhammasamudāyaniddeso tattha tesu samantā sattabbhantaresu ekaṃ abbhantaraṃ nāma aṭṭhavīsatihatthappamāṇaṃ hotīti attho daṭṭhabbo. Ettha pana saṅkhyā kathetabbā. Sā duvidhā parimāṇaminanavasena. Tattha parimāṇa saṅkhyā evaṃ veditabbā catasso muṭṭhiyo eko kuḍuvo. Cattāro kuḍuvā eko pattho, cattāro patthā eko āḷhako. Cattāro āḷhakā ekaṃ doṇaṃ, cattāri doṇāni ekā mānikā. Catasso mānikā ekā khārī. Vīsati khārikā eko vāho. Tadeva ekaṃ sakaṭanti suttanipātaṭṭhakathādīsu vuttaṃ. Sāratthadīpaniyaṃ pana nava vāhasahassānīti ettha catasso muṭṭhiyo kuḍuvo, cattāro kuḍuvā eko pattho, cattāro patthā eko āḷhako. Cattāro āḷhakā ekaṃ doṇaṃ, cattāri doṇāni ekā mānikā, cattasso mānikā ekā khārī. Vīsatikhārikā eko vāho. Tadeva ekaṃ sakaṭanti suttanipātaṭṭhakathādīsu vutta’nti vatvā ‘‘idha pana dve sakaṭāni eko vāhoti vadantī’’ti likhitaṃ paccantavohārena minite pana saṭṭhisataṃ eko vāhoti rañño dhammāsokassa sūvakāhatasāliyā minite pana paccantavohārena vīsādhikatisataṃ hoti eko vāhoti vadanti. Minana saṅkhyā pana evaṃ veditabbā. Tathā hi –
三十六极微,称为一微。
三十六阿拏的量,就被称为一“怛阇梨”。
三十六浮尘量的总和,相当于一车尘的量。
三十六车尘,称为一利叉。
七虮虱为一虱,七虱为一谷粒。
七粒谷为一指,十二指为一拃。
两搩是一肘,七肘是一杖。
二十杖是一牛,八十牛是一拘卢舍;
四牛距,称为一须弥由旬。
‘‘Chattiṃsa paramāṇūnaṃ, aṇumattanti vuccati; Chattiṃ saaṇumattaṃ, tajjārīti pavuccati. Chattiṃ samattātajjārī, rathareṇupamāṇaṃ; Chattiṃsa rathareṇū ca, ekā likkhāti vuccati. Sattalikkhā ca ekūkā, sattūkā dhaññamāsako; Sattadhaññaṅguli ekā, vidatthi dvādasaṅguli. Dve vidatthitu ratanaṃ, sattahatthaṃ ekayaṭṭhi; Vīsayaṭṭhitu usabhaṃ, usabhāsīti gāvutaṃ; Gāvutāni cattāri, meruyojananti vuccatī’’ti.
因为经上说,有一种极微尘极其细微,不是眼睛能看到的,即使是用坚硬岩石做成的身体,甚至须弥山王,它也能穿透过去。三十六个这种极微尘合起来,等于一个极微之聚。三十六个极微之聚合起来,等于一个车轮尘。三十六个车轮尘合起来,等于一个虮。七个虮等于一个虱,七个虱等于一粒谷,七粒谷等于一指宽,十二指宽等于一拃,两拃等于一肘,七肘等于一杖,二十杖等于一牛吼地,八十牛吼地等于一由旬,四由旬称为一座须弥由旬。其中,极微尘在风吹起的时候,能在阳光照到的地方看见,比如从窗缝、墙缝等处透进来的光里。极微之聚则能在车辙、道路等地方,从左右两侧看见。车轮尘则能在它附着的地方看见。虮就非常粗大明显了。这是按照须弥山的量度来说的。
Vuttattā ekā rajo paramāṇu atisukhumā acakkhuviññeyyā, sarīrampi ghanaselamayaṃ sinerupabbatarājampi vinijjhitvā gatā. Tassā chattiṃsaparimāṇaṃ ekoaṇu tajjāritassa chattiṃsaparimāṇaṃ ekārathareṇu. Tassā chattiṃsaparimāṇaṃ ekalikkhā. Sattalikkhā ekā ūkā. Satta ūkā ekaṃ dhaññaṃ. Sattadhaññaṃ ekā aṅguli, dvādasaaṅguli ekā vidatthi. Dve vidatthi ekaratanaṃ. Sattahatthaṃ ekayaṭṭhi, vīsayaṭṭhi ekā usabhā, asīti usabhā gāvutaṃ. Cattāri gāvutāni meruyojananti vuccati. Tattha aṇurajo kiḷañjakuṭṭachiddādīsu vāte pahaṭakāle sūriyālokesu dissati. Tajjārī pana sakaṭamaggādīsu dakkhiṇavāma passādīsu dissati . Rathareṇu pana tassā allīyanaṭṭhānesu dissati. Likkhā pana atioḷārikā pākaṭā hoti. Ayaṃ meruayanavasena vuttaṃ.
十根头发等于一粒芝麻,六粒芝麻等于一粒大麦。
四粒谷等于一指,十五指等于一足。
‘‘Dasa kesā ekatilaṃ, chatilaṃ yavakaṃ bhave; Catuyavañca aṅguli, pañcadasa ekapāda’’nti.
因为这样说,十根头发叫作一粒芝麻,六粒芝麻叫作一粒谷,四粒谷叫作一指,十五指叫作一足。这是按照三部吠陀里的说法来讲的。
Vuttattā dasa kesā ekatilaṃ nāma. Chatilaṃ ekaṃ yavaṃ nāma. Catuyavaṃ eko aṅguli nāma. Pañcadasaṅguliyo eko pādoti vuccati. Idaṃ tīsu vedesu āgatavasena vuttaṃ.
十根头发等于一粒芝麻,六粒芝麻等于一粒大麦。
四谷为一指,八指为一拳,三拳为一宝肘。
‘‘Dasa kesā ekatilaṃ, chatilaṃ yavakaṃ bhave; Catuyavañca aṅguli, aṭṭhaṅguli ekā muṭṭhi, ratanaṃ timuṭṭhi bhave’’ti.
因为这样说,十根头发合起来叫一粒芝麻;六粒芝麻合起来叫一粒大麦;四粒大麦合起来叫一指;八指合起来叫一拳;三拳合起来叫一肘;五肘合起来叫一杖;二十杖合起来叫一牛吼地;八十牛吼地合起来叫一俱卢舍;四俱卢舍合起来叫一由旬。他就是根据这个才这样说的。
Vuttattā dasakesā ekaṃ tilaṃ nāma. Chatilaṃ ekaṃ yavaṃ nāma. Catuyavaṃ ekāaṅguli nāma. Aṭṭhaṅgulaṃ ekāmuṭṭhi. Trimuṭṭhi ekaratanaṃ. Pañca ratanāni ekodaṇḍo. Vīsati daṇḍāni ekousabho. Asīti usabhā ekā gāvī. Catasso gāviyo ekayojananti vuttaṃ, tenevāha.
五肘是一杖,二十杖是一牛吼地。
八十优沙婆为一俱卢舍,四俱卢舍为一由旬。
‘‘Pañcahattho mato daṇḍo, vīsadaṇḍo ca usabho; Asīti usabhā gāvī, catugāvī ca yojana’’nti.
这是按通常的由旬标准来说的。但如果按照轮围山的由旬来换算,
Idaṃ pakatiayanavasena vuttaṃ. Cakkavāḷaayanayojanavasena pana
七肘长的杖叫“死杖”,二十杖长的叫“公牛”;
八十牛吼地为一俱卢舍,四俱卢舍为一由旬。
‘‘Sattahattho mato daṇḍo, vīsadaṇḍo ca usabho; Asīti usabhā gāvī, catugāvī ca yojana’’nti vuttaṃ.
十根头发算一粒芝麻;六粒芝麻算一粒大麦。
四粒大麦等于一指,八指等于一拳。
三拳等于一肘,二十八肘等于一内。
‘‘Dasa kesā ekatilaṃ; Chatilaṃ ekaṃ yavaṃ; Catuyavaṃ ekaṅguli; Aṭṭhaṅgulaṃ ekāmuṭṭhi; Trimuṭṭhi ekaratanaṃ, aṭṭhavīsatiratanaṃ ekaṃabbhantaranti.
已说。因此他说:“在那里,有一个大小为二十八肘的。”在此,“agāmake ce”当中的“a”字是什么意思呢?这个“a”字正是如此。
Vuttaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘tattha ekaṃ aṭṭhavīsatihattappamāṇaṃ hotī’’ti. Ettha ca agāmake ceti ettha akāro kataratthoti, tathā hi akāro.
在遮止、增长、即彼之性、别义、相似的情况下也是如此。
在“相反”、“呵责”、“空无”等语境中,“非”这个前缀表示的是“没有、缺乏”。
Paṭisedhe vuddhitabbhāve, aññatthe sadisepica; Viruddhe garahe suññe, akāro viraha’ppake’ti.
在刚才所说的那些情况里,可以这样看到:在“不使生起”等表达中,是表示遮止;在“不退法”等表达中,是表示增长;在“无过,尊者”等表达中,是表示具有那种性质;在“字母”等表达中,是表示别的意思;在“不死王”等表达中,是表示相似;在“无垢”等表达中,是表示相反;在“这个婆罗门不是最胜者,不是梵行者”等表达中,是表示呵责;在“非村”等表达中,是表示空无;在“无夫之女”等表达中,是表示缺少;在“这不是少女”等表达中,是表示少、不足。这里则应当理解为空无或缺少。若按“空无”的意思,“非村”就是指没有人的纯粹荒野。若按“缺少”的意思,则应当理解为“非村”是指没有村落的地方。正是通过这个“空无”和“缺少”的意思,用“非村”这个词,排除村庄、河流、天然湖、大海之后,其余一切下方承载大地的水以及承载水的风,乃至无缝隙的虚空,再到上方梵天界为止,所有阿修罗、夜叉等住在空中的天众和梵天的宫殿等,全都包括在“荒野”里了。即使在河流与大海之间,有渔夫不能通行的道路,或者有岛屿、山岭,这些也都算在荒野的范围之内。因此,这个七寻范围的“非人”和“纯粹荒野”,在大地范围内、在天界中、在宫殿和如意树等处,也都能成立。不过,在大地上,某个村庄的田地,从那里往下,到能挖出金、摩尼等宝物的地方,这一段才算是村庄的田地。再往下的地方,直到承载大地的水,以及无缝隙的虚空,也都同样能成立。有人会问:在六欲天界里,不也有天宫、如意树、村庄、市镇等吗?那为什么还说那是“荒野”呢?因为非人众生由于种类不同,那些地方对他们来说本来就不是村庄,所以就说“在非人的荒野中”。在畜生道的事物中也有这样的说法:“无论是龙,还是金翅鸟、摩纳婆等中的某一种,甚至包括帝释天王在内,只要是非人的种类,在这个意义上都应理解为畜生。”因此,由于种类不同,非人的住处就是荒野。以上是对内部界限的考察。
Vuttesu dissati tathā hi ajanetvā tiādīsu paṭisedhe dissati. ‘‘Aparihānīyā dhammā’’ti ādīsu vuddhimhi. ‘‘Anavajjaṃ bhante’’ti ādīsu tabbhāve akkharā’ti ādīsu aññatthe. ‘‘Amaru rājā’’tiādīsu sadise. ‘‘Amala’’nti ādīsu viruddhe. ‘‘Aseṭṭhoyaṃ brāhmaṇo abrahmacārī’’ti ādīsu garahe. ‘‘Agāmo’’ti ādīsu suññe. ‘‘Apatikāyaṃitthī’’ti ādīsu virahe. ‘‘Atha nāyaṃ kaññā’’ti ādīsu appake. Idha pana suññe virahe vā daṭṭhabbo. Suññatthena pana agāmake nimanusse kevalāraññeti attho. Virahattho vā agāmake gāmavirahite padeseti attho daṭṭhabbo. Teneva suññatthena virahatthena ‘‘agāmake’’timināpadena gāmanadījātassarasamudde muñcitvā yaṃ anavasesaṃ heṭṭhā pathavīsandhārakaudakampiudakasandhārako vātopi ajaṭākāsampi, tathā yāva uparibrahmalokaṃ upādāya sabbaṃ asurayakkhasurādiākāsaṭṭhakadevabrahmavimānānipi araññantveva saṅgahitā. Nadīsamuddantaresupi macchabandhānaṃ agamanapatho dīpako vā pabbato vā, sopi araññasīmātveva saṅkhyaṃ gacchati, tasmā ayaṃ sattabbhantarasīmā nimanusse kevalāraññe pathavīmaṇḍalepi devaloke vimānakapparukkhādīsupi labbhateva. Pathaviyaṃ pana yasmiṃ gāmakhette heṭṭhā pathaviyā yattha vā suvaṇṇamaṇiādīni khaṇitvā gahetuṃ sakkonti, taṃ padesaṃ gāmakhettameva. Tato parā yāva pathavīsandhārakaudakā ajaṭākāsepi labbhateva. Nanu chakāmāvacara devalokesupi devavimānakapparukkhagāmanigamādayopi attheva. Atha kasmā ‘‘araññā’’ti kathitāti amanussā vā sattā jātibhinnattā ca te agāmāyeva, teneva ‘‘nimanussamhi araññamhī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tiracchānavatthusmimpi ‘‘nāgo vā hotu supaṇṇamāṇavakādīnaṃ vā aññataro antamaso sakkaṃ devarājānaṃ upādāya yo koci amanussajātiko sabbova imasmiṃ atthe tiracchānagatoti veditabbo’’ti vuttaṃ, tasmā jātibhinnatāya amanussāvāso araññanti veditabbo. Abbhantarasīmāya vicāraṇā.
现在讲到水泼界的解释。其中,世尊规定说:“诸比丘,一切河流没有界。一切大海没有界。一切天然湖泊没有界。诸比丘,在河流中、大海中或天然湖泊中,一个中等身材的人向四周泼水所及的范围,在那里就算同一共住、同一布萨。”这就叫水泼界。这里“一切河流没有界”中的“无界”一词,“无”是否定之意,意思是“没有结界的界”。“即使已经宣说了第二遍羯磨的提案,也仍然说是没有结界的界。”或者是否定之意,意思是“不应被认可”。或者是增长之意,就像“无学法”那样,说的是已修学圆满、已修学完毕。这样就是“达到了无界之界的作用”的意思。即使宣说了第二遍羯磨的提案并被认可,也仍然如同未被认可一样,因为就其自性而言,就像村界一样,与结界相似。由此说明了河流、天然湖泊、大海不是结界的范围。这样,通过“诸比丘,一切河流没有界”等语句否定了河流、大海、天然湖泊有结界之后,对于这些在世间通行的河流等没有结界的地方,世尊为了再次避免别众羯磨,想要用沙子等来划定界,于是说:“诸比丘,在河流中、大海中或天然湖泊中,一个中等身材的人向四周泼水所及的范围。”这里“中等身材的人”是指体力中等的人,因此《善见律毗婆沙》中说“以体力中等的人”。如果世尊想要说“木匠身材的人”,就会说“木匠身材的人”,但没有这样说,因此可知是指“体力中等的人”。人有三种:上等的人、中等的人、普通的人。其中上等的人就是一切知者世尊,因为世尊在一切众生中最上,在体力、名声、财富、自在等方面都是如此,如来的体力就是这样。
Idāni udakukkhepasīmāya saṃvaṇṇanākkamo sampatto. Tattha ‘‘sabbā bhikkhave nadī asīmā. Sabbo samuddo asīmo. Sabbo jātassaro asīmo. Nadiyā vā bhikkhave samudde vā jātassare vā yaṃ majjhimassa purisassa samantā udakukkhepā, ayaṃ tattha samānasaṃvāsā ekūposathā’’ti paññattā, ayaṃ udakukkhepasīmā nāma. Tattha ‘‘sabbā bhikkhave nadī asīmā’’ti ettha asīmasadde akāro virahattho, asīmā baddhasīmā virahitāti attho. Ñattidutiyakammavācaṃ sāvetvāpi bandhasīmāvirahitāti vuttaṃ hoti. Paṭisedhattho vā, asammannitabbāti attho. Vuḍḍhiattho vā, ‘‘asekkhā dhammā’’ti yathā sikkhitasikkhā niṭṭhitasikkhāti vuttaṃ hoti. Evaṃ asīmāsīmakiccaniṭṭhappattāti attho. Ñattidutiyakamma vācaṃ sāvetvā sammatāpi asammatāyeva, attano sabhāveneva gāmasīmā viya baddhasīmāsadisāti vuttaṃ hoti. Etena nadījātassarasamuddānaṃ baddhasīmāya akhettabhāvo dassito hoti. Evaṃ ‘‘sabbā bhikkhave nadī asīmā’’tiādinā nadīsamuddajātassarānaṃ baddhasīmābhāvaṃ paṭikkhipitvā tattha lokavohārasiddhāsu etāsu nadīādīsu abaddhasīmāsu puna vaggakammaparihāratthaṃ vālikādīhi sīmaparicchindanaṃ kattukāmo bhagavā ‘‘nadiyā vā bhikkhave samudde vā jātassare vā yaṃ majjhimassa purisassa samantā udakukkhepā’’ti ādimāha. Tattha majjhimassa purisassati thāmamajjhimassa purisassa tenevāha samantapākādikāya vinayaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘thāmamajjhimena purisenā’’ti. Yadi vaḍḍhakīpurisamiccheyya, ‘‘vaḍḍhakīpurisenā’’ti vuttaṃ bhaveyya, na panevaṃ vuttaṃ, tena ñāyati ‘‘thāmamajjhimassa purisassā’’ti. Tividhā hi purisā uttamapuriso majjhimapuriso pakatipurisoti. Tattha uttamapuriso nāma sabbaññu bhagavā, so hi bhagavā sabbasattuttamo thāmayasasampattiissariyādīhi tathā hi tathāgatassa thāmo.
黑象、恒河象、白象、铜黄象,
香象、吉祥象、金象、布萨象、六牙象。
‘‘Kāḷāvakañca gaṅgeyyaṃ, paṇḍaraṃ tambapiṅgalaṃ; Gandhamaṅgalahemañca, uposathaṃ chaddantime’’ti.
应当依据前面所说的十种象族的力量来理解。其中,黑象族是指普通象族,十个男人的身体力量等于一头黑象的力量。十头黑象的力量等于一头恒河象的力量。十头恒河象的力量等于一头白象的力量。十头白象的力量等于一头铜色象的力量。十头铜色象的力量等于一头黄褐色象的力量。十头黄褐色象的力量等于一头香象的力量。十头香象的力量等于一头吉祥象的力量。十头吉祥象的力量等于一头黄金象的力量。十头黄金象的力量等于一头布萨象的力量。十头布萨象的力量等于一头六牙象的力量。十头六牙象的力量等于一位如来的身体力量。这也被称为“那罗延力”。其中,“那罗”指光芒,因为众多不同种类的光芒从它产生,所以叫那罗延,也就是金刚;因此也有“金刚力”的意思。按普通象来算,这是一千俱胝头象的力量;按人来算,这是一万俱胝个男人的力量,这就是如来的身体力量。至于自在力等的种种情况,则应依照各自经文来理解。所谓中等男子,是指壮年男子。因为如来的力量,就像用芥子去衡量须弥山王一样,用百个、千个、百千个中等男子也无法衡量,甚至连他的脚趾尖都抓不住。由于他比普通男子高大,处于中间状态,所以叫中等男子。正如《造小屋戒注》中所说:善逝的搩手等于壮年男子的三搩手,壮年男子的手等于一肘半;壮年男子的搩手等于普通男子的两搩手,普通男子的手等于一肘。也就是说,善逝的搩手如今是中等男子的三搩手,壮年男子的手是一肘半。这里所说的“中等男子”并不是指这个。为什么?因为在《造小屋学处》中只说“三肘”,是以壮年男子的手为三肘。所谓“量足之床”,是以普通搩手为九搩手长的床。这里没有说“以中等男子”,而注书中说“以力中等男子”,所以不同。所谓普通男子,就是前面说的“十个男人的身体力量等于一头黑象的力量”中的那个人。其中,虽然有些有福报的人,比如阿阇世王、耆婆童子,甚至女人如毗舍佉鹿母等,能拥有五头象的力量,但他们并不是中等男子,只是普通男子,因为他们是因福报而成为特殊的人。这里所说的,只是普通男子中的力中等者。所谓“水掷”,是以水掷来界定。因此《母注》中的《显义》说:“水掷”是依格表示工具。它的意思是“以水掷”。在河流、大海、天然水池中,凡是中等男子从四周人群边缘以内,以水掷所界定的地方,这就是那里河流等世间通行的无界区。在《疑度》中又说:凡是中等男子四周水掷所及之处,也就是力中等男子从四周以水掷所界定的地方。那里,就像赌徒掷木球一样,用手取水或沙,力中等男子应以全力掷出。这样掷出的水或沙落下的地方,就叫一个水掷。这就是那里共同居住、同一布萨的界限。这样理解后,这个界限只在河流等内部可得,不在外部。因此,在河流或天然水池中,平时雨季四个月被水覆盖的地方;在大海中,平时波浪退去后停留的地方,从那里开始就是可行区。在少雨时或夏季,河流、天然水池即使干涸,也还是那个可行区。如果在干涸的天然水池或池塘中挖掘或耕作,那个地方就成为村田。然而,所说的可行区之外,水掷界限并不超出,只在内部。因此,应从他们内部人群边缘开始,四周作水掷界定。在《结句》中说:凡是中等男子四周水掷所及之处,这是为了显示这条河上四分僧团等各自作四分僧事等时的界限界定,也是为了显示三衣离宿的界限,就像显示七间屋界一样。因此,即使没有水掷界定,也可以在河内作。这是结论。其中“即使没有水掷界定”这句话,与《大注》所说“四周以水掷界定”,或《母注》《疑度》所说“应作四周水掷界定”,或《除疑》所说“那里也不见中等男子,如此以全力掷出”,或“正是为了这个目的,才用沙等界定界限”等说法不一致。作者为了避开他人的指责,没有说“这是我们的主张”,而是以“诸阿阇梨”指代他人,然后在后面总结说:“这一切都应好好思择,亲近大寺后,应取用合适的,舍弃其余的。”因此应看作是根据其他阿阇梨的意见写的。否则,三结集所载的注书和《疑度》《除疑》的说法都应被涂抹,诸书也会互相矛盾,世尊所制的学处也会依弟子之意而改动。但世尊所制的学处不应被涂抹,应如所制而奉行。因为经中说:比丘知道而饮酒,犯波逸提;沙弥知道而饮酒,破戒;不知道则不犯。其中的理由应寻求。由于制戒是诸佛的境界,所以不应寻求,应如所制而奉行。因此,“四周水掷”应依照所制学处,理解为“四周以水掷界定”,或“应掷水”,或“以水掷界定界限”,或“应作四周水掷界定”。这是法集长老们的说法,他们才是了解佛意的人。而这个说法并不是世尊的亲口说,也不是法集长老们的说法。或者,“凡是中等男子四周水掷”这句话,是为了显示这条河的界限界定,就像显示七间屋界一样。诸阿阇梨这样说,所以即使没有水掷界定,也可以在河内作。这是结论。但在这个理解中,法集长老们没有参与,作者也没有参与。为什么?因为三结集所载的律注及其注释《偈注》中,以多种方式说“以水掷界定,应掷水,应作水掷界定”等,所以可知法集长老们没有参与。作者为了避开他人指责,以“诸阿阇梨”指代他人,所以可知作者也没有参与。而这个说法是某些长老自己的意见,自己的意见其实最无力。用芥子衡量须弥山王的遍知佛陀所制的水掷学处的意义,谁能涂抹大迦叶、耶舍、弥伽利之子帝须等及其弟子传承的大寺住众的说法呢?而且,由于受具足戒等事的重要性,以及佛教的根本性,应郑重对待。“凡是中等男子四周水掷”是世尊所制。那么,是中等男子水掷所及的地方才是水掷界,还是以水掷本身为水掷界?注书阿阇梨为了回答这个责难,说:“那么,水应怎样掷?”其中,“怎样”是表示想问。“水应怎样掷?是以洒水的方式掷,还是以投石、掷木球的方式掷?”意思是后者。所谓“赌徒”,虽然一般地说,但就像“狮子唱歌,狮子摇尾”一样,由于木球掷出的声音邻近,所以从意义上可知是玩木球的赌徒。因为“赌”这个词也通用于赌博。所谓“木球”,是旋转后以线做成的木制品,这是这里的意思。就像赌徒们玩木球,用手拿木球,显示自己的力量,弯身全力掷出;同样,力中等男子用手取水或沙,像显示自己的力量一样,弯身全力,坐着或站着,绕人群边缘后掷出。这样掷出的水或沙落在哪里,这就是一个水掷。通过“这是一个水掷”这句话,显示两个僧团各自作羯磨时,由于界限相邻,还可以有另一个水掷。因此《母注》说:“如果两个僧团各自作布萨等羯磨,应在两个水掷之间另设一个水掷作为近界。”在《除疑》中也说:“那里面,就是那个水掷所界定地方的内部;不仅那里面,从那里外面,也不应站在另一个水掷的内部。这样说,是因为水掷界定难以了知,恐怕破坏羯磨。”在《义显》中则说:“那里面,站在离手掷之外,会破坏羯磨。由此说明,从界定之外任何地方站着,都不破坏羯磨。”然后否定了《母注》的说法,认为那是就一个僧团集会而说的。就像大界被分割后,所结的小界之间为了互相不混杂而设界限间隔;同样,天然界限如村界,在河流、大海、天然水池中,由于太大,世尊允许以水掷为水掷界。但为了像两个已结界限一样互相不混杂,应在两个水掷界之间另设一个水掷作为界限间隔。有相已结界,有水掷水掷界,应看作像界限间隔一样的一个水掷。因此《除疑》说:“这里应知,这种界限间隔的规定,是随顺允许两个已结界设界限间隔的经文而成立的。”在一个僧团集会时,即使站在一个水掷之外,也不破坏羯磨。因为《除
Vuttānaṃ dasannaṃ hatthikulānaṃ balānusārena veditabbo. Tattha kāḷāvaka nti pakatihatthikulaṃ yaṃ dasannaṃ purisānaṃ kāyabalaṃ, taṃ ekassa kāḷāvakassa hatthino balaṃ. Yaṃ dasannaṃ kāḷāvakānaṃ balaṃ, taṃ ekassa gaṅgeyyassa balaṃ. Yaṃ dasannaṃ gaṅgeyyānaṃ balaṃ, taṃ ekassa paṇḍarassa balaṃ, yaṃ dasannaṃ paṇḍarānaṃ balaṃ, taṃ ekassa tambassa balaṃ. Yaṃ dasannaṃ tambānaṃ balaṃ, taṃ ekassa piṅgalassa balaṃ. Yaṃ dasannaṃ piṅgalānaṃ balaṃ, taṃ ekassa gandhahatthino balaṃ. Yaṃ dasannaṃ gandhahatthīnaṃ balaṃ, taṃ ekassa maṅgalassa balaṃ. Yaṃ dasannaṃ maṅgalānaṃ balaṃ, taṃ ekassa hemassa balaṃ. Yaṃ dasannaṃ hemavatānaṃ balaṃ, taṃ ekassa uposathassa balaṃ. Yaṃ dasannaṃ uposathānaṃ balaṃ, taṃ ekassa chaddantassa balaṃ. Yaṃ dasannaṃ chaddantānaṃ balaṃ, taṃ ekassa tathāgatassa kāyabalaṃ. ‘‘Nārāyanasaṅkhātaṃ bala’’ntipi idameva vuccati. Tattha nārā vuccanti rasmiyo, tā bahū nānāvidhā tato uppajjantīti nārayanaṃ, vajiraṃ, tasmā vajirasaṅkhātaṃ balanti pi attho, tadetaṃ pakatihatthigaṇanāya hatthikoṭisahassaṃ, purisagaṇanāya dasannaṃ purisakoṭisahassānaṃ balaṃ hoti, idaṃ tathāgatassa kāyabalaṃ. Issariyādibalavidhānaṃ pana taṃtaṃ suttānusārena veditabbaṃ. Majjhimapuriso nāma vaḍḍhakipuriso so hi tathāgatassa balaṃ paṭicca sinerupabbatarājaṃ sāsapabījena minanto viya satenapisahassenapi satasahassenapi minetuṃ abhabbo, antamaso pādaṅguṭṭha so pādaṅguṭṭhakampi gaṇhetuṃ abhabbova. Tassa pakatipurisato mahantabhāvena majjhe bhavattā majjhimapuriso nāma jāto, tathā hi sugatavidatthi vaḍḍhakissa tisso vidatthiyo, vaḍḍhakihatthena diyaḍḍhahattho hoti, tathā vaḍḍhakividatthi pakatipurisassa dve vidatthiyo, pakatipurisahatthena paripuṇṇahattho hoti tathā hi sugatavidatthi nāma idāni majjhimassa purisassa tisso vidatthiyo, vaḍḍhakihatthena diyaḍḍho hattho hotīti kuṭikārasikkhāpadaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Ayaṃ idha majjhimapurisoti nādhippetā. Kasmā kuṭikārasikkhāpadeyeva tihatthāti vaḍḍhakihatthena tihatthā. Pamāṇayutto mañcoti pakatividatthiyā navavidatthippamāṇo mañcoti vuccati yathā, evaṃ majjhimapurisenā’ti idha avatvā’thāmamajjhimena purisenā’ti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttattā. Pakatipuriso nāma’yaṃ dasannaṃ purisānaṃ kāyabalaṃ, taṃ ekassa kāḷāvakassa hatthino bala’nti vuttapuriso pakatipuriso nāma. Tattha kiñcāpi ekacce puññavantā rājā ajātasattu jīvako komārabhacco itthiyāpi visākhā migāramātāti evamādayo pañcannaṃ hatthīnaṃ balaṃ dhārenti, na pana te majjhimapurisā nāma honti, pakatipuriso yeva, puññavantabhāvena visesapurisattā. Idha pana pakatipurisoyeva thāma majjhimapurisoti adhippeto. Udakukkhepāti udakukkhepena paricchinnā, tenevāha mātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ līnatthappakāsaniyaṃ udakukkhepāti karaṇatthe nissakkavacananti āha. Udakukkhepenā’ti ayañhetthattho . Nadīsamuddajātassaresu yaṃṭhānaṃ majjimassa purisassa samantā parisapariyantato udakukkhepena paricchinnaṃ, ayaṃ tattha nadīādīsu lokavohāra siddhāsu tāsueva abaddhasīmāsu aparāpi samānasaṃvāsā ekūposathāti kaṅkhāvitaraṇiyaṃ pana yaṃ majjhimassa purisassa samantā udakukkhepāti yaṃ ṭhānaṃ thāmamajjhimassa purisassa samantato udakukkhepena paricchinnaṃ. Tattha yathā akkhadhuttā dāruguḷaṃ khipanti, evaṃ udakaṃ vā vālikaṃ vā hatthena gahetvā majjhimena purisena sabbathāmena khipitabbaṃ. Yattha evaṃ khittaṃ udakaṃ vā vālikā patati, ayaṃ udakukkhepo nāma. Ayaṃ tattha samāna saṃvāsā ekūposathāti, ayaṃ tesu nadīādīsu udakukkhepaparicchinnā sīmā samānasaṃvāsāceva ekūposathācā’ti atthayojanaṃ katvā ayaṃ etesaṃ nadīādīnaṃ antoyeva labbhati, na bahi, tasmā nadiyā vā jātassare vā yattakaṃ padesaṃ pakativassakāle catūsu māsesu udakaṃ ottharati, samudde yasmiṃ padese pakativīciyo osaritvā saṇṭhahanti, tatopaṭṭhāya kappiyabhūmi. Dubbuṭṭhikāle vā gimhe vā nadījātassaresu sukkhesupi sāeva kappiyabhūmi. Sace pana sukkhe jātassare vāpiṃ vā khaṇanti vappaṃ vā karonti, taṃ ṭhānaṃ gāmakhettaṃ hoti. Yā panesā kappiyabhūmīti vuttā, tato bahi udakukkhepasīmā na gacchati, antoyeva gacchati, tasmā tesaṃ antoparisapariyantato paṭṭhāya samantāudakukkhepa paricchedo kātabbo’’ti vuttaṃ. Gaṇṭhipade pana yaṃ majjhimassa purisassa samantā udakukkhepāti pana etissā nadiyā catuvaggādīnaṃ saṅghānaṃ visuṃ catuvaggakaraṇīyādikammakaraṇakāle sīmāparicchedadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ, ticīvarena vippavāsaparicchedadassanatthampi sattabbhantarasīmāya paricchedadassanaṃ viyāti ācariyā, tasmā udakukkhepaparicchedābhāvepi antonadiyaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti siddha’nti likhitaṃ. Tattha udakukkhepaparicchedābhāvepī’ti idaṃ padaṃ samantato udakukkhepena paricchinna’nti mahāaṭṭhakathāvacanena vā samantā udakukkhepaparicchedo kātabbo’ti mātikāṭṭhakathāya kaṅkhā vitaraṇiyañca vuttavacanena vā, ‘‘tatthāpi hi majjhimapuriso na ñāyati, tathā sabbathāmena khipana’’nti vā, ‘‘etadatthameva hi vālikādīhi sīmaparicchindana’’nti vā vimativinodanīvacanehi vā na sameti. Ganthakārenāpi parūpavādavivajjanatthaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ amhākaṃ khantī’’ti avatvā’acariyā’ti aññakattāre nidassitvā parato nigamane ‘‘idaṃ sabbaṃ suṭṭhu vicāretvā garukule payirupāsitvā gahetabbaṃ yuttaṃ gahetabbaṃ, itaraṃ chaḍḍetabba’’nti vuttaṃ tasmā aññesaṃ ācariyānaṃ matena likhitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Aññathā tissopi saṅgītiyo ārūḷhe aṭṭhakathāvacane ca kaṅkhāvitaraṇī-vimativinodanīvacanāni ca makkhetabbāni bhaveyyuṃ, ganthāpi aññamaññaviruddhā bhaveyyuṃ, bhagavatā paññattasikkhāpadampi sāvakānaṃ matena paṭisaṅkharitabbaṃ bhaveyya bhagavatā paññattasikkhāpadaṃ pana na makkhetabbaṃ, yathā paññatteyeva vattitabbaṃ vakkhati hi vatthuṃ jānitvāpi majjaṃ pivato bhikkhussa pācittiyaṃ, sāmaṇerassa pana jānitvā pivato sīlabhedo, na ajānitvāti vuttaṃ tattha kāraṇaṃ maggitabbaṃ, sikkhāpada paññattiyā buddhānameva visayattā na vā maggitabbaṃ, yathā paññatteyeva vattitabba’nti tasmā samantā udakukkhepāti paññattasikkhāpadānurūpaṃ samantato udakukkhepena paricchinnanti vā udakaṃ ukkhipitabbanti vā udakukkhepena pi paricchinnā sīmātivā samantā udakukkhepaparicchedo kātabboti vā vuttadhammasaṅgāhakattherānaṃ vacanameva pamāṇaṃ te hi buddhamataññuno, idañca vacanaṃ bhagavato na paccakkhavacanaṃ nāpisaṅgāhakattherānaṃ vacanaṃ athavā ‘‘yaṃ majjhimassa purisassa samantā udakukkhepā’’ti pana etissā nadiyā…pe… sattabbhantarasīmāya paricchedadassanaṃ viya sīmaparicchedadassanatthaṃ vutta’nti ācariyā yasmā vadanti, tasmā udakukkhepaparicchedābhāvepi antonadiyaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti siddhanti imissā atthayojanāya na dhammasaṅgāhakattherāpi paviṭṭhā, ganthakāropi apaviṭṭho. Kasmāti ce tissopi saṅgītiyo ārūḷhesu vinayaṭṭhakathāsuceva tabbivaraṇabhūtāsu silokaṭīkāsu ca ‘‘udakukkhepena paricchinnaṃ, udakaṃ ukkhipitabbaṃ, udakukkhepaparicchedo kātabbo’’ti ādinā bahūhi ākārehi udakukkhepaparicchedameva likhanti, tasmā dhammasaṅgāhakattherāpi appaviṭṭhāti viññāyati ganthakāro pi parūpavādavivajjanatthaṃ ‘‘ācariyā’’ti aññakattāre nidasseti, tasmā gantthakāropi appaviṭṭhoti viññāyati, idañca vacanaṃ kesañci therānaṃ attanomati, attanomatica nāmesā sabbadubbalā, sinerupabbatarājaṃ sāsapabījena minento viya sabbaññubuddhena paññattassa udakukkhepāti sikkhāpadassa atthaṃ vadantānaṃ mahākassapayasamoggaliputtatissapabhutīnañca tesaṃ sissānusissānaṃ mahāvihāravāsīnañca vacanaṃ ko nāma puggalo makkhetuṃ sakkhissati, upasampadādikammassa ca garukammattā sāsanassa mūlattā ca garukeyeva ṭhātabbaṃ. ‘‘Yaṃ majjhimassa purisassa samantā udakukkhepā’’ti bhagavatā paññattaṃ, kathaṃ majjhimassa purisassa udakukkhepārahaṭṭhānameva udakukkhepasīmā, udāhu udakukkhepeneva udakukkhepasīmāti codanaṃ pariharanto aṭṭhakathācariyo kathaṃ pana udakaṃ ukkhipitabbantyādimāha. Tattha kathanti kathetukamyatā pucchā, kathaṃ kena kāraṇena udakaṃ ukkhipitabbaṃ udakāsiñcanasaṅkhepena ukkhipitabbaṃ atha kho leḍḍukhipanadāruguḷakhipanākārena ukkhipitabbanti attho. Akkhadhuttāti sāmaññena vuttepi ‘‘sīho gāyati naṅguṭṭhaṃ, sīho cāleti vāladhi’’nti ettha viya dāruguḷaṃ khipanti saddantarasannidhānato atthavasena dāruguḷakīḷakā dhuttajanāti viññāyati akkhasaddo hi jūtepi nirūḷho. Dāruguḷanti bhamaṃ āropetvā āraggena katadāruvikati ayañhetthattho… yathā akkhadhuttā dāruguḷakā dhuttajanā dāruguḷaṃ hatthena gahetvā attano balaṃ dassentā viya sabbathāmena attānaṃ onamitvā khipanti, evameva thāmamajjhimena purisena udakaṃ vā vālikaṃ vā hatthena gahetvā attano balaṃ dassentāviya onamitvā sabbathāmena nisinnassa vā ṭhitassa vā parisapariyantato anupariyāyitvā khipitabbaṃ, evaṃ cittaṃ udakaṃ vā vālikaṃ vā yattha yasmiṃ ṭhāne patati, ayameko udakukkhepo nāmāti ‘‘ayameko udakukkhepo’’ti iminā padena dvinnaṃ saṅghānaṃ visuṃvisuṃ kammakaraṇādhikāre sīmantarikattā aññassāpi udakukkhepassa sambhavaṃ dasseti, teneva mātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘sace pana dve saṅghā visuṃvisuṃ uposathādikammaṃ karonti, dvinnaṃ udakukkhepānaṃ antare añño eko udakukkhepo upacāratthāya ṭhapetabbo’’ti vuttaṃ, vimativinodaniyampi ‘‘tassa antoti tassa udakukkhepaparicchinnassa ṭhānassa anto na kevalañca tasseva anto, tato bahipi ekassa udakukkhepassa anto ṭhātuṃ na vaṭṭatīti vacanaṃ udakukkhepaparicchedassa dubbijānato kammakopasaṅkā hotī’’ti vuttaṃ, sāratthadīpaniyaṃ pana ‘‘tassa anto hatthapāsaṃ vijahitvā ṭhito kammaṃ kopetīti iminā paricchedato bahi yattha katthaci ṭhito kammaṃ na kopetīti dīpetī’’ti vatvā mātikāṭṭhakathāvacanampi paṭikkhipi, taṃ ekasaṅghaṃ sannipātaṃ sandhāya vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ, yathā ca mahāsīmāya khaṇḍitvā baddhānaṃ khaṇḍasīmānaṃ aññamaññasaṅkaravivajjanatthaṃ sīmantarikā ṭhapitā, evameva attano sabhāvena gāmasīmā viya sayaṃ jātasīmāyaṃ nadīsamuddajātassarānaṃ atimahantabhāvena udakukkhepena udakukkhepasīmā bhagavatā anuññātā, tathāpi dvinnaṃ baddhasīmānamiva aññamaññasaṅkaravivajjanatthaṃ dvinnaṃ udakukkhepasīmānaṃ antare sīmantarikatthāya añño udakukkhepo ṭhapetabbo’ti vuttaṃ, sanimittā baddhasīmā, saudakukkhepā udakukkhepasīmā, sīmantarikā viya eko udakukkhepo daṭṭhabbo, teneva vimativinodaniyaṃ ‘‘idañcettha sīmantarikāvidhānaṃ dvinnaṃ baddhasīmānaṃ sīmantarikāanujānanasuttānulomato siddhanti daṭṭhabba’’nti vuttaṃ, ekasmiṃ saṅghasannipāte pana ekassa udakukkhepassa bahi tiṭṭhantopi kammaṃ na kopetīti daṭṭhabbaṃ vuttañhi vimativinodaniyaṃ bhagavatā nidānavasena ekagāmasīmanissitānaṃ ekasabhāgānañca dvinnaṃ baddhasīmānameva aññamaññaṃ sambhedajjhottharaṇaṃ sīmantarikaṃ vinā abyavadhāne ṭhānañca bhagavatā anumatamevāti ñatvā aṭṭhakathācariyā idhāpi sīmantarikāvidhānamakaṃsu visabhāgasīmānampi hi ekasīmanissitattaṃ ekasabhāvattañcāti dvīhaṅgehi samannāgate sati eva sīmantarikaṃ vinā ṭhānaṃ sambhedāya hoti, nāsatīti daṭṭhabba’nti. Evaṃ nadīsamuddajātassaresu samantāudakukkhepāti paññattasikkhāpadānurūpaṃ udakukkhepena paricchedaṃ dassetvā rassapabhave nadījātassarapadese udakukkhepena vināva attano sabhāvena gāmasīmāyamiva sabbathā kappiyabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ sace pana nātidīghā hoti, pabhavato paṭṭhāya tyādimāha. Tattha pabhavato paṭṭhāyāti yasmiṃ padese catumāsaparamā nadī sandati, tassa uparimabhāgato paṭṭhāyāti attho. Yāva mukhadvārā ti yāva nadītīramevettha mukhadvārāti adhippetā. Sabbatthā’ti sabbasmiṃ nadīpadese udakukkhepasīmākammaṃ natthī ti udakukkhepena pavattā sīmā udakukkhepasīmā. Karitabbanti kammaṃ, karakaraṇeti dhātu, rammapaccayo. Karaṇeti manodvāravīthiyā sattamakusalajavanacittasamuṭṭhāpitavāyodhātuyā vikārabhūto kāyapayogo, tena kāyapayogena khipitabbaṃ uddhaṭaṃ kammanti vuccati paramatthavasena pana kāyapayogasaṅkhātāya cittaṃ javāyodhātuyā vipphārena desantarappattisamuṭṭhāpikā aṭṭhakalāpapuñjāyeva. Udakukkhepasīmāya kammaṃ udakukkhepasīmākammaṃ taṃ ettha rassapabhavanadiyā natthīti attho. Ayañhetthattho sace nadī nātidīghā hoti aḍḍhayojanaṃ vā gāvutaṃ vā aḍḍhagāvutaṃ vā, tassā pavattanaṭṭhānato paṭṭhāya yāva nadītīrā sabbattha nadīpadese ajjhottharitvā saṅgho nisīdati, tattha tasmiṃ nadīpadese samantato avasesanadiyā abhāvā vaggakammasaṅkābhāvena udakukkhepasīmā kammaṃ natthi, kevalā nadī sīmāyevāti sāratthadīpaniyampi mātikāṭṭhakathāyalīnatthappakāsaniyampi etadeva sanniṭṭhānaṃ vuttaṃ vimativinodaniyaṃ pana yattha khuddake araññe mahantehi vā bhikkhūhi paripuṇṇatāya vaggakammasaṅkābhāvena sattabbhantarasīmāpekkhā natthi, tattha satthabbhantarasīmā na uppajjati, kevalāraññasīmāyeva tattha saṅghena kammaṃ kātabbaṃ nadīādīsupi eseva nayo vakkhati hi sace nadī nātidīghā hoti, pabhavato paṭṭhāya yāvamukhadvārā sabbattha saṅgho nisīdati, udakukkhepasīmākammaṃ natthī’ti ādi ca ubhayatthāpi ca. Yassaṃ disāyaṃ sattabbhantarassa vā udakukkhepassa vā okāso nappahoti, tattha kathaṃ minanaṃ khipanaṃ vā bhaveyya, gāmakhettādīsu pavisanato akhette sīmā paviṭṭhā nāmātisīmā vipajjeyya, apekkhāya sīmuppattiyaṃ pana yato pahoti, tattha sattabbhantaraudakukkhepasīmā sayameva paripuṇṇā jāyanti. Yato pana nappahoti, tattha attano khettappamāṇeneva jāyanti, na bahīti vuttaṃ, ettha ca’sīmāpekkhāya sattabbhantaraudakukkhepasīmā sayameva paripuṇṇā jāyantī’ti vuttattā udakukkhepaṃ vināyeva apekkhāya sīmāya udakukkhepasīmā uppajjatī’ti atthaṃ vadanti, taṃ ayuttarūpaṃ viya dissati. Kasmāti ce pāḷinayavirodhato vimativinodaniyaṃ parato vuttavacanenāpi virodhato ca. Idañca vacanaṃ ācariyassa kesañci puggalānaṃ vādappakāsanatthaṃ vuttaṃ bhaveyya. Kasmā parato vuttavacanena aghaṭiyattā ca pāḷiyaṭṭhakathāṭīkāvacanehipi virujjhanato ca, taṃ parato vaṇṇayissāma. Yathā ca loke vatiṃ aparikkhipitvā ‘‘idaṃ vatiyā ṭhāna’’nti ca yathā ca naṅgalakoṭiyā akasitvā ‘‘idaṃ kasikaṭṭhāna’’nti ca yathā ca vatthuṃ karontā manussā kudhārīpharasuādinā rukkhe acchinditvā ‘‘idaṃ mama kudhāripatanaṭṭhāna’’nti ca yathā ca dāttena alāyitvā ‘‘idaṃ mama lāyitaṭṭhāna’’nti ca na sakkā vattuṃ, evameva udakaṃ vā vālikaṃ vā hatthena akhipitvā ‘‘ayameko udakukkhepoti ca, udakapatanaṭṭhānanti ca na sakkā vattuṃ. Ettha ca dve bhikkhū evaṃ vivādaṃ karonti vimativinodaniyaṃ ‘‘yattha khuddake araññe mahantehi bhikkhūhi paripuṇṇatāya vaggakammasaṅkābhāvena sattabbhantarasīmāpekkhā natthi, tattha sattabbhantarasīmā na uppajjati, kevalāraññasīmāyeva tattha saṅghena kammaṃ kattabbaṃ nadī ādīsupi eseva nayo. Vakkhati hi sace nadī nātidīghā hoti. Pabhavato paṭṭhāya yāva mukhadvārā sabbattha saṅgho nisīdati, udakukkhepasīmākammaṃ natthī’tiādiṃ, iminā eva vacanena vaggakammaparihāratthaṃ sīmāpekkhāya sati eva udakukkhepasīmā sattabbhantarasīmā uppajjanti, nāsatīti daṭṭhabba’nti vuttattā udakukkhepaṃ vināva parisapariyantato paṭṭhāya sīmāpekkhāya saheva udakukkhepasīmā uppajjati tasmā udakukkhepena payojanaṃ natthevāti te evaṃ vattabbā ‘‘mā sappurisā evaṃ vadeyyātha ācariyavarañca mā abbhācikkhatha idañca vacanaṃ ācariyavarassa neyyavacanaṃ, paratopi ācariyavaro sanniṭṭhānaṃ vakkhati vinayaṭṭhakathāsuceva sāratthadīpaniyañca vuttavacanehipi tava vacanaṃ asaṃsandeva, vimativinodaniyameva parato vuttavacanenāpi na ghaṭiyati. Kathaṃ neyyavacanaṃ hotīti. ‘‘Sīmāpekkhāya sati eva…pe… nassatī’’ti ettha sīmāpekkhāya vinā maggagamananhānādi atthehi bhikkhūhi araññe vā nadīādīsupivā paviṭṭhakkhaṇeyeva nuppajjati, sīmāpekkhāya satieva araññe samantā sattabbhantarā’ti paññattasikkhāpadānurūpaṃ abbhantarasīmā uppajjati’ nadīsamuddajātassaresupi majjhimassa purisassa samantā udakukkhe’pāti paññatta sikkhāpadānurūpaṃ udakukkhepena saha udakukkhepasīmā uppajjati, na udakukkhepena vināti ayaṃ neyyattho. Nāsatītiettha udakukkhepena vināti atthopi na labbhate. Evañca sati vimativinodaniyaṃ yeva puna tatthāti lokavohārasiddhāsu etāsu nadīādīsu tīsu abaddhasīmāsu punavaggakammaparihāratthaṃ sāsanavohārasiddhāya abaddhasīmāya paricchedaṃ dassentoti adhippāyo. Pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘yaṃ majjhimassa purisassā’’ti ādīsu udakaṃ ukkhipitvā khipiyati etthāti udakukkhepo, udakassa pathanokāso, tasmā udakukkhepā. Ayañhettha padasambandhavasena attho… ‘‘parisa pariyantato paṭṭhāya samantā yāva majjhimassa purisassa udakukkhepo udakapatanaṭṭhānaṃ, tāva yaṃ taṃ paricchinnaṃ ṭṭhānaṃ, ayaṃ tattha nadīādīsu aparā samānasaṃvāsā udakukkhepasīmā’’ti vuttaatthapadehipi samānaṃ bhaveyya ācariyameva hi kecipana samantā abbhantaraṃ minitvā paricchedakaraṇeneva sīmā sañjāyati, na sayamevāti vadanti, taṃ na gahetabbhantyādinā kecivādaṃ paṭikkhipitvā minanakhipane dosaṃ dassetvā ca yaṃ panettha abbhantaraminanappamāṇassa vālikādikhipanakammassa ca dassanaṃ, taṃ sayaṃjātasīmānaṃ ṭhitaṭṭhānaparicchedadassanatthaṃ kataṃ, gāmūpacāragharūpacārajānanatthaṃ leḍḍusuppādikhipanavijānanadassanaṃ viya, teneva mātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ sīmaṃ vā bandhanti udakukkhepaṃ vā pariccheda’nti vuttaṃ, evaṃ katepi tassa paricchedassa pabhavato ñātuṃ asakkuṇeyyattena thūlato ñatvā antotiṭṭhantehi nirāsaṅkaṭṭhāne ṭhātabbaṃ aññaṃ bahikarontehi atidūre nirāsaṅkaṭṭhāne pesetabbanti vā, tasmā yathā vuttasīmāpekkhavaseneva tāsaṃ sattabbhantaraudakukkhepasīmānaṃ uppatti, tabbigamena vināso ca gahetabboti amhākaṃ khanti, vīmaṃsitvā gahetabbaṃ, añño vā pakāro ito yuttataro gavesitabbo’ti āha. Vīmaṃsitvā gahetabbaṃ. Añño vā pakāro ito yuttataro gavesitabbo’ti iminā ācariyassa vacanena imassa vacanassa attanomatibhāvañca ācariyassa apaṭisambhidāpattabhāvañca dasseti. Idañca vacanaṃ na bhagavato paccakkhavacanaṃ, nāpidhammasaṅgāhakattherānaṃ vacanaṃ, tissopi saṅgītiyo anārūḷhā, nāpi aṭṭhakathāya saṃvaṇṇanācariyassa vādappakāsanameva tasmā asallakkhitabbameva sāratthadīpaniyampi sace nadī nātidīghā hotīti imissā saṃvaṇṇanādhikāre udakukkhepasīmā kammaṃ natthīti yasmā sabbopi nadīpadeso bhikkhūhi ajjhotthaṭo, tasmā samantato nadiyā abhāvā udakukkhepena payojanaṃ natthī’ti vuttaṃ tathā hi samantato nadiyā abhāvā udakukkhepena payojanaṃ natthī’tiimassa anvayavasena vā atthāpattivasena vā samantato nadiyā bhāve sati udakukkhepena payojanaṃ attheva vaggakammaparihāratthanti attho labbhate mātikāṭṭhakathāya līnatthappakāsaniyampi ‘‘samantā udakukkhepaparicchedo kātabboti pahonakaṭṭhānaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ yattha pana kunnadiyaṃ nappahoti. Tattha pahonakaṭṭhāne udakukkhepaparicchedo kātabbo’tivuttaṃ. Udakukkhepaparicchedo kātabbo’ti iminā vacanena sīmāpekkhāya saha udakukkhepaṃ vinā attano sabhāveneva nuppajjatīti viññāyati, tathā hi udakukkhepaparicchedake kattāre asati kathaṃ udakukkhepaparicchedo kātabbo bhaveyya tasmā ‘‘vaggakammaparihāratthaṃ sīmāpekkhāya sati eva udakukkhepasattabbhantarasīmā uppajjanti, nāsatī’ti idaṃ vacanaṃ sāratthadīpaniyañca mātikāṭṭhakathāyañca vuttavacanehi aññamaññaviruddhaṃ viya dissati vimativinodaniyaṃyeva ca ‘‘mahoghena pana unnataṭṭhānato ninnaṭṭhāne patantena khato khuddako vā mahanto vā lakkhaṇayutto jātassarova etthāpi khuddake udakukkhepakiccaṃ natthi samudde pana sabbathā udakukkhepasīmāyameva kammaṃ kātabbaṃ, sodhetuṃ dukkarattā’’ti vuttaṃ tathā hi ayamācariyavaro pubbe ‘‘vaggakammaparihāratthaṃ sīmāpekkhāya sati eva udakukkhepasattabbhantarasīmā uppajjanti, nāsatī’’ti vatvā parato kathamācariyavarena ‘‘etthāpi khuddake udakukkhepakiccaṃ natthi’’tyādivacanamuccate, tatthāyaṃ viggaho udakaṃ ukkhipitvā khipīyati etthāti udakukkhepo udakassa patanokāso kintuṃ, ṭhānaṃ karitabbaṃ kiccaṃ kara karaṇeti dhātu riccapaccayo yaṃ. ‘‘Ajjeva kiccaṃ ātappa’’nti yathā, udakukkhepassa kiccaṃ karaṇaṃ udakukkhepakiccaṃ. Samudde panā ti ettha pana saddo visesattho, pakkhantaratthotipi apare visesatthe pana nadījātassaresu mahantesu udakukkhepasīmāyameva kātabbaṃ, khuddake pana kevale nadījātassarepi kātabbaṃ samudde pana visesato udakukkhepasīmāyameva kātabbanti ayaṃ pana saddassa visesattho. Sabbathā ti sabbena sabbaṃ. Udakukkhepasīmāyamevā ti ettha evakāro sanniṭṭhānattho, udakukkhepasīmāyameva kammaṃ kātabbaṃ, na samuddasīmāya kadācīti attho yujjateva. Nadījātassaresu pana mahantesu udakukkhepasīmāya kātabbaṃ, khuddake nadījātassareyeva na kātabbanti ayaṃ attho sāmatthiyato labbhateva nadījātassaresu khuddakamahantabhāvena nadījātassaraudakukkhepāti dve dve sīmā labbhanti samudde pana kasmā samuddaudakukkhepavasena dve na labbhantīti samudde pana kasmā samuddaudakukkhepavasena dve na labbhantīti codanaṃ manasisandhāyāha ‘‘sodhetuṃ dukkarattā’’ti. Tattha sodhetuṃ dukkarattā ti samuddassa atimahantabhāvena samuddamotiṇṇe bhikkhū hatthapāsanayanaṃ vā bahisamuddakaraṇaṃ vā kātuṃ atidukkaraṃ tasmā sabbathā sabbena sabbaṃ udakukkhepasīmāyameva kātabbanti ayamācariyavarassa adhippāyo. Yadi vaggakammaparihāratthaṃ sīmāpekkhāya sati eva udakukkhepasīmā uppajjeyya, evaṃ sati samuddamotiṇṇe bhikkhusamūheva hatthapāsato bahi kareyya, evañca sati sodhetuṃ dukkarattā’ti hetupadampi niratthakaṃ bhaveyya na panevaṃ sakkā vattuṃ, tena ñāyati ‘‘vaggakammaparihāratthaṃ udakukkhepapayojana’’nti. Apica tesaṃ ācariyānaṃ adhippāyena ‘‘mayaṃ udakukkhepasīmāya na karoma, kevalaṃ samuddeyeva karomā’’ti icchamāne sati kathaṃ karissanti. Tasmā tesaṃ matena sīmāpekkhāya saheva udakukkhepasīmāya sambhavato gatagataṭṭhāne udakukkhepasīmā bhaveyya evañca sati ‘‘samudde pana sabbathā udakukkhepasīmāyameva kammaṃ kātabbaṃ, sodhetuṃ dukkarattā’’ti vacanampi niratthakaṃ bhaveyya evañca pana vadeyya… sabbaso samuddasīmāya alabbhamānataṃ sandhāya ‘‘samudde panā’’tyādivacanaṃ ācariyavarena vuttanti tathāpi na vattabbaṃ kasmā evañca atthe icchamāne sati ‘‘samudde pana sabbattha udakukkhe pasīmāva labbhatī’’ti vattabbaṃ siyā nanevaṃ vuttaṃ. Athavā pakaraṇādivasena saddatthe vibhajjīyamānepi virujjhateva kathaṃ saṃyogavasena ‘‘savacchaṃ dhenumānehī’’ti vutte ‘‘gāvī’’ti viññāyati, na vaḷavā. ‘‘Avacchaṃ dhenu’’nti vutte gāvīti viññāyati, na vaḷavāti ettha viya kadācipi evasaddena nivattetabbassa samuddassa nadiyamiva nātidīghabhāve alabbhamāne sati ‘‘samudde pana sabbathā udakukkhepasīmāyameva kammaṃ kātabba’’nti evakārena avattabbaṃ siyā, tathā hi saṃyogavippayogavasena ‘‘savacchaṃ dhenuṃ, avacchaṃ dhenu’’nti vutte gāvīti viññāyati, na vaḷavā. Vaḷavā ca nāma yonimaggassa atisambādhattā vijāyituṃ na sakkonti, gabbhassa pariṇatakāle kucchiṃ phāletvā ājaññapotakaṃ gaṇhanti evaṃ ekagabbheneva maranti tasmā ‘‘vaḷavaṃ savaccha’’ntivā avaccha’’nti vā vattuṃ nārahati evameva kadācipi nātidīghasamuddassapi anupalabbhamānattā taṃ nivattāpakena evasaddena ‘‘samudde pana sabbathā udakukkhepasīmāyameva kammaṃ kātabba’’nti apadisituṃ nārahatiyeva tasmā udakukkhepena sīmā uppajjatīti niṭṭhametthāva gantabbaṃ tena vuttaṃ ‘‘evañca atthe icchamāne sati samudde pana sabbathā udakukkhepasīmāva labbhatīti vattabbaṃ siyā na panevaṃ vutta’’nti tena ñāyati vaggakammaparihāratthaṃ vālikādīhi khipananti apica vimativinodaniyaṃyeva ‘‘gacchantiyā pana nāvāya kātuṃ na vaṭṭati. Kasmā udakukkhepamattameva hi sīmā, taṃ nāvā sīghameva atikkameti evaṃ sati aññissā sīmāya ñatti, aññissā anusāvanā hotī’’ti imassa saṃvaṇṇanādhikāre tanti sīmaṃ. Sīghameva atikkametīti iminā taṃ anatikkamitvā anto eva parivattamānāya kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti dasseti. Etadatthameva hi vālikādīhi sīmāparicchindanaṃ. Itarathā ‘‘bahiparivattā nukho no vā’’ti kammakopasaṅkā bhaveyya. Aññissā anusāvanāti kevalāya nadīsīmāya anusāvanā’ti ācariyavarena vuttaṃ. Yadisī māpekkhāya saha attano sabhāvena udakukkhepasīmā uppajjeyya, evaṃ sati nāvāya gatagataṭṭhāne samantato sabhā viya parikhipitvā udakukkhepasīmā uppajjeyya, uppajjamānepi ca aññissā anusāvanāti ca aparāya udakukkhepasīmāya anusāvanāti vattabbaṃ bhaveyya na panevaṃ vuttaṃ athāpi vadeyya ‘‘paṭhamotiṇṇaṭṭhāneyeva sīmāpekkhā hoti, gatagataṭṭhāne natthī’’ti, tampi vacanaṃ ayuttameva. Kasmā yāva kammaṃ na nipphannaṃ, tāva sīmāpekkhāya vinā asambhavato tena ñāyati ‘‘vaggakammaparihāratthaṃ udakukkhepaṃ vinā sīmāpekkhāya saheva attano sabhāvena udakukkhepasīmā nuppajjatī’’ti niṭṭhametthāva gantabbaṃ tasmā nāvāya kammaṃ karontehi thirataraṃ katvā nāvaṃ agamanīyaṃ katvāva kātabbaṃ. Sāratthadīpaniyampi ‘‘gacchantiyā pana nāvāya kātuṃnavaṭṭatīti ettha udakukkhepaṃ anatikkamitvā parivattamānāya kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti veditabba’’nti vuttaṃ. Evañca pana vadeyya ‘‘yāva parisā vaḍḍhati, tāva sīmāpi vaḍḍhati parisapariyantato udakukkhepoyeva pamāṇanti vinayaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttattā parisavasena vaḍḍhamānā udakakhipanaṃ vināyeva vaḍḍhati upacārasīmā viya tasmā udakukkhepena payojanaṃ natthevā’’ti. Taṃ nu, ayañhetthattho… udakukkhepasīmā nāmesā vaḍḍhamānā parisavaseneva vaḍḍhati baddhasīmāyaṃ pana vaḍḍhamānā samūhavasena vaḍḍhati. Kasmā parisavasena vaḍḍhamānā parisapariyantato udakukkhepo kātabboti. Apare evaṃ vadanti pubbe udakukkhepoyeva pamāṇaṃ, puna udakukkhepakiccaṃ natthi, kathinatthatasāṭakadānakammavācāviya tathā hi kathinatthatasāṭakadānakāle vuttakammavācā ekāyevavaṭṭati, atthateyeva kathine puna varasāṭakaṃ labhitvā kammavācāya dānakiccaṃ natthi evameva etthāpi pubbe udakukkhepoyeva pamāṇaṃ, puna udakukkhepakiccaṃ natthīti te upacārasīmāyamiva maññitvā vadanti upacārasīmāyañhi purisāya nisinnaṭṭhānameva upacārasīmābhāvena vaḍḍhati idha pana parisapariyantato udakukkhepappamāṇena vaḍḍhatiyeva na udakukkhepaṃ vināva ijjhate ‘‘kathaṃ pana udakaṃ ukkhipitabbaṃ yathā akkhadhuttā dāruguḷaṃ khipanti, evaṃ udakaṃ vā vālikaṃ vā hatthena gahetvā thāmamajjhimena purisena sabbathāmena khipitabbaṃ, yattha evaṃ khittaṃ udakaṃ vā vālikaṃ vā patati, ayameko udakukkhepo’’ti aṭṭhakathāvacanaṃ bhindanti nāma. Kimivāti ce, ye pana ‘‘kammameva kammakaraṇaṃ karoti, natthi nirayapālā’’ti vadanti, te ‘‘atthi bhikkhave niraye nirayapālā’’ti devadūtasuttaṃ bhindanti viyāti. Evañcapana vadeyya ye udakukkhepena saha ijjhanti, tepi ‘‘sacepi hi bhikkhusahassaṃ tiṭṭhati, tassa ṭhitokāsassa bāhirantato paṭṭhāya bhikkhūnaṃ vaggakammaparihāratthaṃ sīmāpekkhāya uppannāya tāya saha sayameva sañjātā sattabbhantarasīmā samānasaṃvāsakāti adhippāyo. Yattha pana khuddake araññe mahantehi vā bhikkhūhi paripuṇṇatāya vaggakammasaṅkābhāvena sattabbhantarasīmāpekkhā natthi, tattha sattabbhantarasīmā na uppajjati, kevalāraññasīmāyameva tattha saṅghena kammaṃ kātabbaṃ nadīādīsupi esevanayo’’ti vimati vinodaniyaṃ vuttavacanaṃ bhindanti nāmāti. Taṃ na, tena no kā hāni evampi amhākaṃ vāde koci virodho na vijjateva. Kasmāti ce, ime dve saddaracanāpi asambandhāva bhinnalakkhaṇā bhinnavisayā cetā sīmā. Kathaṃ saddaracanā asambandhā. Yathā araññe tattha sattabbhantarasīmā na uppajjati, kevalāraññamevāti vuccati, eva meva ‘‘nadiyāpi sabbattha saṅgho nisīdati, udakukkhepasīmā nuppajjatī’’ti avatvā ‘‘udakukkhepasīmā kammaṃ natthī’’ti kriyāparāmasanavasena vuttaṃ. Karitabbaṃ kammaṃ. Kiṃ taṃ, khipanaṃ. Evampi saddaracanā asambandhāva. ‘‘Vaggakammaparihāratthaṃ…pe… udakukkhepasīmā sattabbhantarasīmā uppajjati, nāsatī’’ti ettha ‘‘nāsatī’’ti imassa udakukkhepena vināpīti atthopi yujjateva. Kasmāti ce ‘‘sīmāpekkhāya satievā’’ti iminā anulomanayavasena ‘‘sīmāpekkhāya asati nuppajjatī’’ti attho yujjateva. Kecipana ‘‘samantā abbhantaraṃ minitvā paricchedakaraṇeneva sīmā sañjāyati, na sayamevā’’ti vadanti taṃ na gahetabbaṃ. Yadi hi…pe… yathā cettha, evaṃ udakukkhepasīmāyapi nadīādīsupi tatthāpi hi majjhimapuriso na ñāyati, tathā sabbathāmena khipananti imināpi vacanena ācariyavarassa udakukkhepena saheva sīmāpekkhāya sati udakukkhepasīmā uppajjati, nāsatīti adhippāyo ñāyati. Kathaṃ bhinnalakkhaṇā, gāmasīmasattabbhantaraudakukkhepasīmā kiñcāpi abaddhasīmasāmaññena samānā, na pana samānalakkhaṇā tathā hi ‘‘asammatāya bhikkhave sīmāya aṭṭhapitāya yaṃ gāmaṃ vā nigamaṃ vā upanissāya viharati, yā tassa gāmassa vā gāmasīmā, nigamassa vā nigamasīmā, ayaṃ tattha samānasaṃvāsā ekūposathā’’ti imasmiṃ sikkhāpade khuddako vā mahanto vā sabbopi gāmapadeso gāmasīmāti anuññātā, na sattabbhantarasīmāya viya samantā leḍḍupātukkhepena anuññātā abbhantarasīmāyapi agāmake ce araññe yaṃ nissāya viharati, tassa araññassa araññasīmāti nānuññātā tathā nadīsamuddajātassaresupi gāmasīmāyamiva sabbo nadīsamuddajātassarapadeso nadīsamuddajātassa rasīmāti evameva na anuññātā tathā abbhantarasīmāyamiva samantā sattabbhantarāti vā nānuññātā evamimā gāmasīmasattabbhantaraudakukkhepasīmā bhinnalakkhaṇā, tasmā bhagavatā paññattasikkhāpadānusāreneva gāmasīmāyapi khuddako vā mahanto vā sabbo gāmapadeso gāmasīmāva hoti, sattabbhantarasīmāyapi ‘‘samantā sattabbhantarā’’ti paññattasikkhāpadānusārena samantā sattabbhantarasīmā sīmāpekkhāya saha sayameva uppajjatī’’ti minanāminanavicāraṇā pana niratthakāva tathā udakukkhepasīmāyapi ‘‘majjhimassa purisassa samantā udakukkhepā’’ti paññattasikkhāpadānurūpaṃ udakukkhepena saheva uppajjatīti natthi khipanākhipana vicāraṇāya payojananti. Kathaṃ bhinnavisayā sattabbhantarasīmā araññavisayā, udakukkhepasīmā nadīsamuddajātassaravisayā, evampi etā gāmasīmasattabbhantaraudakukkhepasīmā bhinnavisayāva tasmā ‘‘nadīādīsu eseva nayo’’ti vuttepi sattabbhantarasīmā apekkhāya saheva attano sabhāveneva sattabbhantarasīmā uppajjati yathā. Evameva udakukkhepasīmāyapi apekkhāya saha udakukkhepaṃ katvāva vaggakammaparihāratthaṃ udakukkhepasīmā uppajjati, na vināti sanniṭṭhānaṃ kātabbaṃ. Nanu ca mātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ paricchedabbhantare hatthapāsaṃ vijahitvā ṭhitopi, paricchedā bahi aññaṃ tattakaṃyeva paricchedaṃ anatikkamitvā ṭhitopi kammaṃ kopeti, idaṃ sabbaaṭṭhakathāsu sinniṭṭhāna’nti vuttavacane navirujjhatīti ce. Taṃ na, mātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘sace pana dvesaṅghā visuṃvisuṃ uposathādikammaṃ karonti, dvinnaṃ udakukkhepānaṃ antare añño eko udakukkhepo upacāratthāya ṭhapetabbo’’ti dvinnaṃ saṅghānaṃ visuṃ visuṃ kammakaraṇādhikāre vuttattā. Sāratthadīpaniyampi ‘‘tattha aññaṃ tattakaṃyeva paricchedaṃ anatikkamitvā ṭhitopi kammaṃ kopetīti idaṃ neva pāḷiyaṃ, na aṭṭhakathāyaṃ upalabbhati. Yadi cetaṃ dvinnaṃ saṅghānaṃ visuṃvisuṃ uposathādikammakaraṇādhikāre vuttattā udakukkhepato bahi aññaṃ udakukkhepaṃ anatikkamitvā uposathādikaraṇatthaṃ. Ṭhito saṅgho sīmāsambhedasambhavato kammaṃ kopetīti iminā adhippāyena vuttaṃ siyā. Evaṃ sati yujjeyya, teneva mātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ līnatthappakāsaniyaṃ aññaṃ tattakaṃyeva paricchedanti dutiyaṃ udakukkhepaṃ anatikkamantopi kopeti. Kasmā, attano udakukkhepasīmāya paresaṃ udakukkhepasīmāya ajjhotthatattā sīmāsambhedo hoti, tasmā kopetī’ti ‘‘idaṃ sabbaaṭṭhakathāsu sanniṭṭhāna’’nti ca iminā adhippāyena vuttanti gahetabbaṃ. Sabbāsupi aṭṭhakathāsu sīmāsambhedassa anicchitattā teneva attano ca aññesañca udakukkhepaparicchedassa antarā añño udakukkhepo sīmantarikatthāya ṭhapetabboti vuttaṃ. Aññe panettha aññathāpi papañcenti, taṃ na gahetabba’nti vatvā paṭikkhittaṃ. Tassa ‘‘antohatthapāsaṃ vijahitvā ṭhito kammaṃ kopetī’’ti iminā paricchedato bahi yatthakatthaci ṭhito kammaṃ na kopetīti dīpetīti sāratthadīpanīvacanenāpi ekasmiṃ saṅghasannipāte paricchedato bahi aññaṃ tattakaṃyeva paricchedaṃ anatikkamitvā ṭhitopi kammaṃ na kopetīti veditabbametaṃ sāratthadīpaniyaṃyeva imamatthaṃ daḷhikaraṇavasena udakukkhepappamāṇā sīmantarikā suviññeyyatarā hoti, sīmāsambhedasaṅkā ca na siyāti sāmicidassanatthaṃ añño udakukkhepo sīmantarikatthāya ṭhapetabbo’ti vuttaṃ. Yattakena pana sīmāsambhedo na hoti, tattakaṃ ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭatiyeva, tenāhu porāṇā ‘‘yattakena sīmasaṅkaro na hoti, tattakampi ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭati. Khuddakaṃ pana na vaṭṭatī’’ti idampi udakukkhepasīmāya parisavasena vaḍḍhanato sīmasambhedasaṅkā siyā. Taṃ nivāraṇatthameva vuttanti.
巴利三藏、注释书,以及复注、疑惑解等类著作,
让那些诗坛高手反复看过之后再思量吧。
这里要讨论的是关于水界(以水为标记的边界)的判定。
Pāḷiṃ aṭṭhakathañceva, ṭīkāvimatiādike; Oloketvā punappunaṃ, maññantu kavipuṅgavāti; Ayamettha udakukkhepasīmāya vicāraṇā.
所谓“地方界”,是指在一个国王统治的境内,作为大臣们居住地的每一个区域,每一个这样的区域就叫做地方界。
Janapadasīmā nāma ekassa rañño vijite pavatto mahāmaccānaṃ nivāsabhūto ekameko padeso janapadasīmā nāma.
所谓“王国界”,指的是迦尸、憍萨罗等十六个大国。它们也被称为“十六大城市”。其中,十六大国就是:鸯伽国、摩揭陀国、憍萨罗国、跋耆国、支提国、俱卢国、般遮罗国、马差国、苏罗娑国、阿湿波国、阿槃提国、犍陀罗国、末罗国、剑浮沙国。这些就是十六大国。这十六大国仅存在于中部地区,被称为大国;除此之外,像孙那波兰陀国等其他许多国家,数量还要更多。同样,在边地一带,也有罗曼那等许多不同种类的大国,这些全都称为王国界。不过在世俗的说法中,某个地区如果住着刹帝利、婆罗门、吠舍、首陀罗这四种姓,这个地区就被称为“大国”。古人就是这样说的。
Raṭṭhasīmā nāma kāsikosalādikā soḷasa mahājanapadā. ‘‘Soḷasamahānagara’’ntipi tesaṃ nāmaṃ. Tattha soḷasa mahājanapadāni nāma. Aṅgaraṭṭhaṃ, magadharaṭṭhaṃ, kosalaraṭṭhaṃ, vajjiraṭṭhaṃ, cetiyaraṭṭhaṃ, kururaṭṭhaṃ, pañcālaraṭṭhaṃ, majjharaṭṭhaṃ, surasenaraṭṭhaṃ, assakaraṭṭhaṃ, avantiraṭṭhaṃ, gandhālaraṭṭhaṃ, mallaraṭṭhaṃ, kambojaraṭṭhanti imāni soḷasamahājanapadāni nāma. Ime soḷasamahājanapadā majjhimapadeseyeva pavattā mahāraṭṭhā nāma tadaññepi sunāparantaraṭṭhādikā bahutarāva. Tathā paccantavisayepi rāmaññādikā anekappabhedā mahāraṭṭhā attheva tepi sabbe raṭṭhasīmā nāma. Lokiyasatthesu pana yasmiṃ padese khattiyabrāhmaṇavessasuddavasena catuvaṇṇāni vasanti, so padeso ‘‘mahāraṭṭho’’ti pavuccati. Vuttañhe taṃ porāṇehi.
四种姓的所行,若在某地不存在,
那个地方被称为蜜落患国,其余之地则是功德之地。
‘‘Pavattā catuvaṇṇānaṃ, yasmiṃ padese na vijjate; So milakkhudeso vutto, puññabhūmi tato para’’nti.
王国疆域,就是一位国王的命令所通行的地方,这叫作王国疆域。
Rajjasīmā nāma ekassa rañño āṇāpavattaṭṭhānaṃ rajjasīmā nāma.
所谓岛屿界,就是存在于大海之中或河流中间的岛屿,这叫岛屿界。不过,如果某个岛上有村庄有人居住,那个岛就只算作村界。因为后面会说到:在干涸的天然水池处挖池塘或筑堤坝,那个地方就成为村田。
Dīpasīmā nāma samuddantare vā nadimajjhe vā pavattā dīpā dīpasīmā nāma. Yasmiṃ pana dīpe gāmā vasanti, so gāmasīmātveva saṅkhyaṃ gacchati, vakkhati hi sukkhe jātassare vāpiṃ vā khaṇanti vappaṃ vā karonti, taṃ ṭhānaṃ gāmakhettaṃ hotīti.
轮围界的长度和宽度是一百二十万三千四百五十由旬。
Cakkavāḷasīmā nāma ‘‘āyāmato ca vitthārato ca yojanānaṃ dvādasasatasahassāni tīṇisahassāni cattārisatāni paññāsañcayojanāni.
‘‘Sabbaṃ satasahassāni, chattiṃsaparimaṇḍalaṃ; Dasañceva sahassāni, aḍḍhuḍḍhāni satānicā’’ti.
有人说,一个轮围世界就叫作“轮围界”。这样一共有十五种界。其中,有神通的人无论在哪一种界里做布萨等僧团事务,去到那里的比丘们,为了对有资格取欲的人做伸手所及范围内的引导,或者做界外之作,取欲后行事,只要能够办成就行,这就是标准。像这样,如果办不到,那就是针对没有神通的人说的:在特别大的森林里,周围允许以七个 abbhantara 为界。在那里,考虑到界的问题,周围七个 abbhantara 的界,本身就是自然形成的。同样,在河流、大海、天然湖泊里,也允许以中等身材的人为中心、四周水洒所及的范围为界。在那里,也是为了避开别众羯磨,考虑到界的问题,随着水洒所及,水洒界就产生了。同样,在村、镇、乡、城、国、王境的界里,也是为了避开别众羯磨,允许设立结定的界。至于后面的村界、七个 abbhantara 界、水洒界,则是随顺经教、依其能力而允许的。在小的村、镇、乡、城里,去到那里的比丘们,净化了比丘们,对于应当取欲的人取了欲,在僧团和合同意之下,就可以做布萨等僧团事务。同样,在小的森林里、河流里、天然湖泊里,也可以随自己方便做布萨等僧团事务。
Vuttaṃ ekaṃ cakkavāḷaṃ cakkavāḷasīmā nāma. Evaṃ pannarasappabhedā hoti sīmā. Tattha iddhimā puggalo yasmiṃ yasmiṃ vā sīme uposathādisaṅghakammaṃ karoti, tattha tattha gate bhikkhū hatthapāsanayanaṃ vā bahisīmakaraṇaṃ vā kātuṃ chandārahānaṃ, chandaṃ āharitvā kātuṃ sakkuṇeyyabhāvoyeva pamāṇaṃ. Evamasakkonte aniddhimapuggale sandhāya atimahantāraññe samantā sattabbhantarasīmā anuññātā. Tattha sīmāpekkhāya saha samantā sattabbhantarasīmā attano sabhāveneva jātā tathā nadīsamuddajātassaresupi majjhimassa purisassa samantā udakukkhepasīmā anuññātā tatthapi vaggakammaparihāratthaṃ sīmāpekkhaṃ katvā udakukkhepena saha udakukkhepasīmā uppajjati tathā gāmanigamajanapadanagararaṭṭharajjasīmāsupi vaggakammaparihāratthaṃ baddhasīmā anuññātā. Tato paresu pana gāmasīmasattabbhantaraudakukkhepasīmā nuññātasuttānulomanayasāmatthiyato khuddakesu gāmanigamajanapadanagaresu tattha tattha gate bhikkhū sodhetvā chandārahānaṃ chandaṃ āharitvā samaggassa saṅghassa anumatiyāva uposathādisaṅghakammaṃ kātabbameva tathā khuddake araññepi nadījātassarepi yathāsukhaṃ uposathādisaṅghakammaṃ kātabbamevāti.
如此,从区分界定这一特征来看,即使本质上没有差别,但按有联结与无联结来说,也有两种。按这种分类则有十五种。若从各自的具体形态来说,则有小界、近行界、同一共住界、不离界、利养界、村界、镇界、城界、内部界、林界、水掷界、河界、天然湖界、海界、乡界、国界、王土界、岛界、轮围界等十九种。这里舍弃了界过失的特征,阐明界成就的特征,名为《界清净论》的著作至此完成。
Evaṃ paricchindanalakkhaṇena abhedepi baddhābaddhavasena duvidhā. Tappabhedena pannarasavidhā, sarūpavasena pana khaṇḍasīmā, upacārasīmā, samānasaṃvāsasīmā, avippavāsasīmā, lābhasīmā, gāmasīmā. Nigamasīmā, nagarasīmā, abbhantarasīmā, araññasīmā, udakukkhepasīmā, nadīsīmā, jātassarasīmā, samuddasīmā, janapadasīmā, raṭṭhasīmā, rajjasīmā, dīpasīmā, cakkavāḷasīmātiekūnavīsappabhede pi sīme vipattilakkhaṇaṃ pahāya sampattilakkhaṇappakāsakaṃ sīmavisodhanīnāma pakaraṇaṃ samattaṃ.
名为《界限净化》,是从各种典籍中汇编出来的。
请诸位贤善的诗王听我说,我要开始创作了。
巴利、义注,以及论母和句分别;
彻底潜入那一切,一次又一次,毫无遗漏。
在他自己写的论著以及复注和难解之句中,
在《决断》和《除疑》中,也在论母和注释书里。
把一切毫无遗漏地汇总到一起,
这就是已经展开的注释,能让有智慧的人感到欢喜。
‘‘Sīmavisodhaniṃ nāma, nānāganthasamāhaṭaṃ; Karissaṃ me nisāmentu, sādhavo kavipuṅgavā. Pāḷiṃ aṭṭhakathañceva, mātikāpadabhājaniṃ; Ogāhetvāna taṃ sabbaṃ, punappunamasesato. Attanomatiganthesu, ṭīkāgaṇṭhipadesu ca; Vinicchayavimatīsu, mātikāṭṭhakathāsupi. Sabbaṃ asesakaṃ katvā, saṃsanditvāna ekato; Pavattā vaṇṇanā esā, tosayantī vicakkhaṇe’’ti.
这些偈颂句子的含义,已经全面详细地解说了。
Imesaṃ gāthāpadānaṃ attho sabbaso saṃvaṇṇito hoti.
所谓“众会成就”,是指除了二十一种应当避开的人之外,如今通过第四羯磨(即白三羯磨)受具足戒的比丘们,在边地国家从五人僧团开始,在中部国家从十人僧团开始,全都坐在伸手可及的范围内不离开,这就叫众会成就。
其中,二十一种应当避开的人,根据“诸比丘,不得与未受具戒者同坐”等说法,以及下面“诸比丘,不得在比丘尼坐着的众会中诵巴帝摩卡”等次第所说,包括:比丘尼、在学尼、沙弥、沙弥尼、已舍弃学处者、犯根本罪者、因不见罪被举罪者、因不忏悔罪被举罪者、因不舍恶见被举罪者、黄门、贼住者、叛投外道者、畜生、杀母者、杀父者、杀阿拉汉者、污比丘尼者、破僧者、出佛身血者、二根者。他们的意思是,这些人以待在界外的方式坐着。
如果他们在伸手可及的范围内,或者就在界内,不把他们排除出去,而五人僧团等清净大众坐在伸手可及的范围内不离开,那么作法的僧团是有过失的,但羯磨本身不会失效,为什么呢?因为他们不够资格被排除。
不过另一些人这样说:因为犯根本罪者没有被列入“不应礼敬”的名单中,与他一起躺卧也不犯“同宿”罪,而且接受他的食物也不算犯戒,所以那种做法更合理。应当知道:只要他还承认自己是比丘,就应当被礼敬;但当他说“我不是沙门”时,就不应当被礼敬。这是这里的区别。
犯根本罪的人,只有在他承认自己是比丘时,才算是比丘,之后就不算了。因为不承认自己是比丘的人,就归入未受具戒者那一类。正如《中部注》和《显扬真义》中所说:一个曾经犯过根本罪的比丘,如果自己不知道这件事,和五人僧团一起做布萨等僧团羯磨,作法的僧团没有过失,羯磨也不会失效——这只是他们的主张而已。
为什么呢?因为没有同宿罪,是因为他仍被认定为比丘;接受他的食物也算有效,是因为对那个人相信他是比丘。和那个人同宿也不犯同宿罪,接受食物也有效。对于二十一种应当避开的人,如果也是这种情况,因为不加简别,和五人僧团一起做布萨等僧团羯磨,作法的僧团不是故意犯过失,故无过失。但羯磨会失效——这是我们的主张。比这更合理的说法如果找得到,就应当去寻找。
Parisasampattināma ekavīsativajjanīyapuggale vajjetvā etarahi ñatticatutthakammena upasampannā bhikkhū paccantimesu janapadesu pañcavaggato paṭṭhāya, majjhimesu janapadesu dasavaggato paṭṭhāya sabbe hatthapāsaṃ avijahitvā nisinnā honti, ayaṃ parisasampatti nāma. Tattha ekavīsati vajjanīyā nāma ‘‘na bhikkhave saga ṭṭhāya parisāyā’’ti vacanato heṭṭhā ‘‘na bhikkhave bhikkhuniyā nisinnaparisāya pātimokkhaṃ uddisitabba’’nti ādinānayena vuttā bhikkhunī, sikkhamānā, sāmaṇero, sāmaṇerī, sikkhāpaccakkhātako, antimavatthuajjhāpannako, āpattiyā adassane ukkhittako, āpattiyā appaṭikamme ukkhittako, pāpikāya diṭṭhiyā appaṭinissagge ukkhittako, paṇḍako, theyyasaṃvāsako, titthiyapakkantako, tiracchānagato, māghātutako, pitughātako, arahantaghātako, bhikkhunidūsako, saṅghabhedako, lohituppādako, ubhatobyañjanakoti te bahisīmakaraṇavasena nisinnāti attho. Yadi te hatthapāse vā sīmeyeva vā honti, te avajjetvā pañcavaggādiko pakatattagaṇo hatthapāsaṃ avijahitvā nisinno hoti, kārakasaṅgho sāvajjo, kammaṃpana na kuppati kasmā avaggārahattā. Aparepana evaṃ vadanti antimavatthuajjhāpannassa avandanīyesu avuttattā, tena saddhiṃ sayantassa sahaseyyāpattiyā abhāvato tassa ca paṭiggahaṇassa rūhanatoti tadeva yuttataranti viññāyati, kiñcāpi yāva so bhikkhubhāvaṃ paṭijānāti, tāva vanditabbo. Yadā pana ‘‘assamaṇomhī’’ti paṭijānāti, tadā na vanditabboti ayamettha viseso veditabbo. Antimavatthuajjhāpannassa hi bhikkhubhāvaṃ paṭijānantasseva bhikkhubhāvo, na tatoparaṃ. Bhikkhubhāvaṃ appaṭijānanto hi anupasampannapakkhaṃ bhajatīti majjhimagaṇṭhipade sāratthadīpaniyañca vuttattā antimavatthu ajjhāpannapubbo bhikkhu attano kāraṇaṃ ajānitvāva tena saha pañcavaggagaṇo uposathādisaṅghakammaṃ karoti, kārakasaṅgho anavajjo, kammampi na kuppatīti, tesaṃ matimattameva. Kasmā sahaseyyāpatti abhāvopi tassa bhikkhusaññāya patiṭṭhitattā, paṭiggahaṇaruhaṇassa ca tasmiṃ puggale bhikkhūti saddahitattā tena puggalena sahaseyyāpattipi natthi, paṭiggahaṇañca ruhati, ekavīsativajjanīyapuggalepi tathāvidhassa avicārikattā tena saha pañcavaggagaṇo uposathādisaṅghakammaṃ karonto kārakasaṅgho asañcicca anupavajjo. Kammaṃ pana kuppatīti amhākaṃ khanti, ito yuttataro labbhamāno pariyesitabbova.
像这样,从事、白、宣告、界、僧众这五方面的圆满具足来说,就是“五支具足”;或者从僧团和合,以不可动摇、合处、堪任其位的白四羯磨而获得上位来说,就是以这两种原因得名“白四羯磨具足戒”。这种身份实在是极其难得的。
Evaṃ vatthuñattianusāvanasīmaparisasampattivasena pañcahi aṅgehi sampannoti pañcaṅgoti vā samaggena saṅghena ñatticatutthena kammena akuppena ṭhānārahena uparibhāvaṃ samāpannoti vā dvīhi kāraṇehi laddhanāmo ñatti catutthaupasampannabhāvo atidullabhova.
佛陀出世如此难得,由此,出家与受具足戒,这三句的含义已被说出。
Evaṃ buddhuppādo dullabho, tato pabbajjā ca upasampadā cā ti imesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ padānaṃ atto vuttoyeva hoti.